Compact EH Support
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
4 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7 @c in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/obj-*.c
10 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11 @c %**start of header
12 @setfilename as.info
13 @c ---config---
14 @macro gcctabopt{body}
15 @code{\body\}
16 @end macro
17 @c defaults, config file may override:
18 @set have-stabs
19 @c ---
20 @c man begin NAME
21 @c ---
22 @include asconfig.texi
23 @include bfdver.texi
24 @c ---
25 @c man end
26 @c ---
27 @c common OR combinations of conditions
28 @ifset COFF
29 @set COFF-ELF
30 @end ifset
31 @ifset ELF
32 @set COFF-ELF
33 @end ifset
34 @ifset AOUT
35 @set aout-bout
36 @end ifset
37 @ifset ARM/Thumb
38 @set ARM
39 @end ifset
40 @ifset Blackfin
41 @set Blackfin
42 @end ifset
43 @ifset BOUT
44 @set aout-bout
45 @end ifset
46 @ifset H8/300
47 @set H8
48 @end ifset
49 @ifset SH
50 @set H8
51 @end ifset
52 @ifset HPPA
53 @set abnormal-separator
54 @end ifset
55 @c ------------
56 @ifset GENERIC
57 @settitle Using @value{AS}
58 @end ifset
59 @ifclear GENERIC
60 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
61 @end ifclear
62 @setchapternewpage odd
63 @c %**end of header
64
65 @c @smallbook
66 @c @set SMALL
67 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
68 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
69 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
70 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
71 @c
72 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
73 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
74 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
75 @c break.
76 @c
77 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
78 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
79 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
80 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
81 @c discretion, of course.
82 @ifinfo
83 @set SMALL
84 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
85 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
86 @end ifinfo
87
88 @ifnottex
89 @dircategory Software development
90 @direntry
91 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
92 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
93 @end direntry
94 @end ifnottex
95
96 @finalout
97 @syncodeindex ky cp
98
99 @copying
100 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
102 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
103 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
104
105 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
106 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
107 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
108 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
109 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
110 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
111
112 @c man end
113 @end copying
114
115 @titlepage
116 @title Using @value{AS}
117 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
118 @ifclear GENERIC
119 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
120 @end ifclear
121 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
122 @sp 1
123 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
124 @end ifset
125 @sp 1
126 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
127 @sp 1
128 @sp 13
129 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
130 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
131 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
132 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
133 distracting the boss while they got some work
134 done.
135 @sp 3
136 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
137 @page
138 @tex
139 {\parskip=0pt
140 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
141 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
142 }
143 %"boxit" macro for figures:
144 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
145 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
146 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
147 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
148 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
149 @end tex
150
151 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
152 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
153
154 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
155 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
156 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
157 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
158 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
159 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
160
161 @end titlepage
162 @contents
163
164 @ifnottex
165 @node Top
166 @top Using @value{AS}
167
168 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
169 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
170 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
171 @end ifset
172 version @value{VERSION}.
173 @ifclear GENERIC
174 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
175 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
176 @end ifclear
177
178 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
179 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
180 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
181
182 @menu
183 * Overview:: Overview
184 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
185 * Syntax:: Syntax
186 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
187 * Symbols:: Symbols
188 * Expressions:: Expressions
189 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
190 @ifset ELF
191 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
192 @end ifset
193 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
194 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
195 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
196 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
197 * AS Index:: AS Index
198 @end menu
199 @end ifnottex
200
201 @node Overview
202 @chapter Overview
203 @iftex
204 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
205 @ifclear GENERIC
206 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
207 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
208 @end ifclear
209 @end iftex
210
211 @cindex invocation summary
212 @cindex option summary
213 @cindex summary of options
214 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
215 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
216
217 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
218
219 @ignore
220 @c man begin SEEALSO
221 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
222 @c man end
223 @end ignore
224
225 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
226 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
227 @smallexample
228 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
229 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
234 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
235 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
236 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}] [@b{-o}
238 @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}] [@b{--statistics}]
239 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}] [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}]
240 [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}] [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
241 [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
242 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
243 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
244 @c
245 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
246 @c Add an empty line for separation.
247 @ifset AARCH64
248
249 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
250 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
251 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
252 @end ifset
253 @ifset ALPHA
254
255 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
256 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
257 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
258 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
259 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
260 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
261 @end ifset
262 @ifset ARC
263
264 @emph{Target ARC options:}
265 [@b{-marc[5|6|7|8]}]
266 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
267 @end ifset
268 @ifset ARM
269
270 @emph{Target ARM options:}
271 @c Don't document the deprecated options
272 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
273 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
274 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
275 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
276 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
277 [@b{-mthumb}]
278 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
279 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
280 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
281 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
282 @end ifset
283 @ifset Blackfin
284
285 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
286 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
287 [@b{-mfdpic}]
288 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
289 [@b{-mnopic}]
290 @end ifset
291 @ifset CRIS
292
293 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
294 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
295 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
296 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
297 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
298 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
299 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
300 @end ifset
301 @ifset D10V
302
303 @emph{Target D10V options:}
304 [@b{-O}]
305 @end ifset
306 @ifset D30V
307
308 @emph{Target D30V options:}
309 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
310 @end ifset
311 @ifset EPIPHANY
312
313 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
314 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
315 @end ifset
316 @ifset H8
317
318 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
319 [-h-tick-hex]
320 @end ifset
321 @ifset HPPA
322 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
323 @end ifset
324 @ifset I80386
325
326 @emph{Target i386 options:}
327 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
328 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
329 @end ifset
330 @ifset I960
331
332 @emph{Target i960 options:}
333 @c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
334 [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
335 @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
336 [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
337 @end ifset
338 @ifset IA64
339
340 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
341 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
342 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
343 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
344 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
345 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
346 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
347 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
348 @end ifset
349 @ifset IP2K
350
351 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
352 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
353 @end ifset
354 @ifset M32C
355
356 @emph{Target M32C options:}
357 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
358 @end ifset
359 @ifset M32R
360
361 @emph{Target M32R options:}
362 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
363 @b{--W[n]p}]
364 @end ifset
365 @ifset M680X0
366
367 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
368 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
369 @end ifset
370 @ifset M68HC11
371
372 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
373 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
374 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
375 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
376 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
377 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
378 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
379 @end ifset
380 @ifset MCORE
381
382 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
383 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
384 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
385 @end ifset
386 @ifset METAG
387
388 @emph{Target Meta options:}
389 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
390 @end ifset
391 @ifset MICROBLAZE
392 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
393 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
394 @end ifset
395 @ifset MIPS
396
397 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
398 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
399 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
400 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
401 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
402 [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}]
403 [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}]
404 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
405 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
406 [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips32r6}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
407 [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}] [@b{-mips64r6}]
408 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
409 [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
410 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
411 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
412 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
413 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
414 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
415 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
416 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
417 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
418 [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
419 [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}]
420 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
421 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
422 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
423 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
424 [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
425 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
426 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
427 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
428 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
429 @end ifset
430 @ifset MMIX
431
432 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
433 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
434 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
435 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
436 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
437 @end ifset
438 @ifset NIOSII
439
440 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
441 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
442 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
443 @end ifset
444 @ifset NDS32
445
446 @emph{Target NDS32 options:}
447 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
448 [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
449 [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}] [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
450 [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
451 [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
452 [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
453 [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
454 [@b{-mb2bb}]
455 @end ifset
456 @ifset PDP11
457
458 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
459 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
460 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
461 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
462 @end ifset
463 @ifset PJ
464
465 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
466 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
467 @end ifset
468 @ifset PPC
469
470 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
471 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
472 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
473 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
474 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
475 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
476 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-ma2}|@b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
477 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
478 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
479 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
480 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
481 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
482 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
483 @end ifset
484 @ifset RL78
485
486 @emph{Target RL78 options:}
487 [@b{-mg10}]
488 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
489 @end ifset
490 @ifset RX
491
492 @emph{Target RX options:}
493 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
494 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
495 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
496 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
497 [@b{-mpid}]
498 [@b{-mrelax}]
499 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
500 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
501 @end ifset
502 @ifset S390
503
504 @emph{Target s390 options:}
505 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
506 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
507 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
508 @end ifset
509 @ifset SCORE
510
511 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
512 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
513 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
514 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
515 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
516 @end ifset
517 @ifset SPARC
518
519 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
520 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
521 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
522 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}]
523 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}] [@b{-bump}]
524 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
525 @end ifset
526 @ifset TIC54X
527
528 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
529 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
530 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
531 @end ifset
532 @ifset TIC6X
533
534 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
535 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
536 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
537 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
538 @end ifset
539 @ifset TILEGX
540
541 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
542 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
543 @end ifset
544 @ifset TILEPRO
545 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
546 @end ifset
547 @ifset VISIUM
548
549 @emph{Target Visium options:}
550 [@b{-mtune=@var{arch}}]
551 @end ifset
552 @ifset XTENSA
553
554 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
555 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
556 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
557 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
558 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
559 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
560 @end ifset
561 @ifset Z80
562
563 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
564 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
565 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
566 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
567 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
568 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
569 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
570 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
571 @end ifset
572 @ifset Z8000
573
574 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
575 @end ifset
576
577 @c man end
578 @end smallexample
579
580 @c man begin OPTIONS
581
582 @table @gcctabopt
583 @include at-file.texi
584
585 @item -a[cdghlmns]
586 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
587
588 @table @gcctabopt
589 @item -ac
590 omit false conditionals
591
592 @item -ad
593 omit debugging directives
594
595 @item -ag
596 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
597
598 @item -ah
599 include high-level source
600
601 @item -al
602 include assembly
603
604 @item -am
605 include macro expansions
606
607 @item -an
608 omit forms processing
609
610 @item -as
611 include symbols
612
613 @item =file
614 set the name of the listing file
615 @end table
616
617 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
618 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
619 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
620
621 @item --alternate
622 Begin in alternate macro mode.
623 @ifclear man
624 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
625 @end ifclear
626
627 @item --compress-debug-sections
628 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed
629 to begin with @samp{.zdebug}, and the resulting object file may not be
630 compatible with older linkers and object file utilities. Note if compression
631 would make a given section @emph{larger} then it is not compressed or renamed.
632
633 @ifset ELF
634 @cindex @samp{--compress-debug-sections=} option
635 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
636 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
637 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
638 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
639 These options control how DWARF debug sections are compressed.
640 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} is equivalent to
641 @option{--nocompress-debug-sections}.
642 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} and
643 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} are equivalent to
644 @option{--compress-debug-sections}.
645 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi} compresses
646 DWARF debug sections with SHF_COMPRESSED from the ELF ABI.
647 @end ifset
648
649 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
650 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is the default.
651
652 @item -D
653 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
654 other assemblers.
655
656 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
657 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
658 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
659
660 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
661 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
662 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
663 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
664 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
665 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
666
667 @item -f
668 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
669 compiler output).
670
671 @item -g
672 @itemx --gen-debug
673 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
674 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
675 ECOFF or DWARF2.
676
677 @item --gstabs
678 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
679 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
680
681 @item --gstabs+
682 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
683 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
684 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
685 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
686 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
687
688 @item --gdwarf-2
689 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
690 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
691 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
692
693 @item --gdwarf-sections
694 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
695 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
696 corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
697 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
698 @var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text}
699 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
700 suffix.
701
702 @item --size-check=error
703 @itemx --size-check=warning
704 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
705
706 @item --help
707 Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
708
709 @item --target-help
710 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
711
712 @item -I @var{dir}
713 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
714
715 @item -J
716 Don't warn about signed overflow.
717
718 @item -K
719 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
720 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
721 @end ifclear
722 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
723 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
724 @end ifset
725
726 @item -L
727 @itemx --keep-locals
728 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
729 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
730 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
731 @ifclear man
732 @xref{Symbol Names}.
733 @end ifclear
734
735 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
736 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
737 listing to @var{number}.
738
739 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
740 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
741 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
742
743 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
744 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
745 @var{number} bytes.
746
747 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
748 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
749 to @var{number} + 1.
750
751 @item -o @var{objfile}
752 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
753
754 @item -R
755 Fold the data section into the text section.
756
757 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
758 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
759 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
760 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
761 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
762 requirements at the expense of speed.
763
764 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
765 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
766 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
767 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
768
769 @item --statistics
770 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
771 assembly.
772
773 @item --strip-local-absolute
774 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
775
776 @item -v
777 @itemx -version
778 Print the @command{as} version.
779
780 @item --version
781 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
782
783 @item -W
784 @itemx --no-warn
785 Suppress warning messages.
786
787 @item --fatal-warnings
788 Treat warnings as errors.
789
790 @item --warn
791 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
792
793 @item -w
794 Ignored.
795
796 @item -x
797 Ignored.
798
799 @item -Z
800 Generate an object file even after errors.
801
802 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
803 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
804
805 @end table
806 @c man end
807
808 @ifset AARCH64
809
810 @ifclear man
811 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
812 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
813 @end ifclear
814
815 @ifset man
816 @c man begin OPTIONS
817 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
818 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
819 @c man end
820 @c man begin INCLUDE
821 @include c-aarch64.texi
822 @c ended inside the included file
823 @end ifset
824
825 @end ifset
826
827 @ifset ALPHA
828
829 @ifclear man
830 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
831 for an Alpha processor.
832 @end ifclear
833
834 @ifset man
835 @c man begin OPTIONS
836 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
837 processor.
838 @c man end
839 @c man begin INCLUDE
840 @include c-alpha.texi
841 @c ended inside the included file
842 @end ifset
843
844 @end ifset
845
846 @c man begin OPTIONS
847 @ifset ARC
848 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
849 an ARC processor.
850
851 @table @gcctabopt
852 @item -marc[5|6|7|8]
853 This option selects the core processor variant.
854 @item -EB | -EL
855 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
856 @end table
857 @end ifset
858
859 @ifset ARM
860 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
861 processor family.
862
863 @table @gcctabopt
864 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
865 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
866 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
867 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
868 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
869 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
870 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
871 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
872 @item -mthumb
873 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
874 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
875 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
876 @item -EB | -EL
877 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
878 @item -mthumb-interwork
879 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
880 ARM code in mind.
881 @item -mccs
882 Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
883 @item -k
884 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
885 @end table
886 @end ifset
887 @c man end
888
889 @ifset Blackfin
890
891 @ifclear man
892 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
893 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
894 @end ifclear
895
896 @ifset man
897 @c man begin OPTIONS
898 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
899 the Blackfin processor family.
900 @c man end
901 @c man begin INCLUDE
902 @include c-bfin.texi
903 @c ended inside the included file
904 @end ifset
905
906 @end ifset
907
908 @c man begin OPTIONS
909 @ifset CRIS
910 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
911 @end ifset
912
913 @ifset D10V
914 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
915 a D10V processor.
916 @table @gcctabopt
917 @cindex D10V optimization
918 @cindex optimization, D10V
919 @item -O
920 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
921 @end table
922 @end ifset
923
924 @ifset D30V
925 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
926 processor.
927 @table @gcctabopt
928 @cindex D30V optimization
929 @cindex optimization, D30V
930 @item -O
931 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
932
933 @cindex D30V nops
934 @item -n
935 Warn when nops are generated.
936
937 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
938 @item -N
939 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
940 @end table
941 @end ifset
942 @c man end
943
944 @ifset EPIPHANY
945 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
946 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
947
948 @ifclear man
949 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
950 configured for an Epiphany processor.
951 @end ifclear
952
953 @ifset man
954 @c man begin OPTIONS
955 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
956 an Epiphany processor.
957 @c man end
958 @c man begin INCLUDE
959 @include c-epiphany.texi
960 @c ended inside the included file
961 @end ifset
962
963 @end ifset
964
965 @ifset H8300
966
967 @ifclear man
968 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
969 for an H8/300 processor.
970 @end ifclear
971
972 @ifset man
973 @c man begin OPTIONS
974 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
975 processor.
976 @c man end
977 @c man begin INCLUDE
978 @include c-h8300.texi
979 @c ended inside the included file
980 @end ifset
981
982 @end ifset
983
984 @ifset I80386
985
986 @ifclear man
987 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
988 configured for an i386 processor.
989 @end ifclear
990
991 @ifset man
992 @c man begin OPTIONS
993 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
994 an i386 processor.
995 @c man end
996 @c man begin INCLUDE
997 @include c-i386.texi
998 @c ended inside the included file
999 @end ifset
1000
1001 @end ifset
1002
1003 @c man begin OPTIONS
1004 @ifset I960
1005 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1006 Intel 80960 processor.
1007
1008 @table @gcctabopt
1009 @item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
1010 Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
1011
1012 @item -b
1013 Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
1014
1015 @item -no-relax
1016 Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
1017 error if necessary.
1018
1019 @end table
1020 @end ifset
1021
1022 @ifset IP2K
1023 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1024 Ubicom IP2K series.
1025
1026 @table @gcctabopt
1027
1028 @item -mip2022ext
1029 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
1030
1031 @item -mip2022
1032 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
1033 just the basic IP2022 ones.
1034
1035 @end table
1036 @end ifset
1037
1038 @ifset M32C
1039 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1040 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
1041
1042 @table @gcctabopt
1043
1044 @item -m32c
1045 Assemble M32C instructions.
1046
1047 @item -m16c
1048 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1049
1050 @item -relax
1051 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1052
1053 @item -h-tick-hex
1054 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1055
1056 @end table
1057 @end ifset
1058
1059 @ifset M32R
1060 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1061 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1062
1063 @table @gcctabopt
1064
1065 @item --m32rx
1066 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
1067 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1068
1069 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1070 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1071 encountered.
1072
1073 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1074 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1075 encountered.
1076
1077 @end table
1078 @end ifset
1079
1080 @ifset M680X0
1081 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1082 Motorola 68000 series.
1083
1084 @table @gcctabopt
1085
1086 @item -l
1087 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1088
1089 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1090 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1091 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1092 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1093 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1094
1095 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1096 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1097 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1098 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1099 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1100 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1101
1102 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1103 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1104 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1105
1106 @end table
1107 @end ifset
1108
1109 @ifset NIOSII
1110
1111 @ifclear man
1112 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1113 for an Altera Nios II processor.
1114 @end ifclear
1115
1116 @ifset man
1117 @c man begin OPTIONS
1118 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1119 Altera Nios II processor.
1120 @c man end
1121 @c man begin INCLUDE
1122 @include c-nios2.texi
1123 @c ended inside the included file
1124 @end ifset
1125 @end ifset
1126
1127 @ifset PDP11
1128
1129 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1130 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1131
1132 @table @gcctabopt
1133 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1134 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1135 default is @option{-mpic}.
1136
1137 @item -mall
1138 @itemx -mall-extensions
1139 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1140
1141 @item -mno-extensions
1142 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1143
1144 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1145 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1146
1147 @item -m@var{cpu}
1148 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1149 disable all other extensions.
1150
1151 @item -m@var{machine}
1152 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1153 model, and disable all other extensions.
1154 @end table
1155
1156 @end ifset
1157
1158 @ifset PJ
1159 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1160 a picoJava processor.
1161
1162 @table @gcctabopt
1163
1164 @cindex PJ endianness
1165 @cindex endianness, PJ
1166 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1167 @item -mb
1168 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1169
1170 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1171 @item -ml
1172 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1173
1174 @end table
1175 @end ifset
1176
1177 @ifset M68HC11
1178 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1179 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1180
1181 @table @gcctabopt
1182
1183 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1184 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1185 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1186
1187 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1188 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1189 XGATE address space.
1190
1191 @item -mshort
1192 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1193
1194 @item -mlong
1195 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1196
1197 @item -mshort-double
1198 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1199
1200 @item -mlong-double
1201 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1202
1203 @item --force-long-branches
1204 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1205 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1206 sub routine.
1207
1208 @item -S | --short-branches
1209 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1210 when the offset is out of range.
1211
1212 @item --strict-direct-mode
1213 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1214 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1215
1216 @item --print-insn-syntax
1217 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1218
1219 @item --print-opcodes
1220 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1221
1222 @item --generate-example
1223 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1224 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1225
1226 @end table
1227 @end ifset
1228
1229 @ifset SPARC
1230 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1231 for the SPARC architecture:
1232
1233 @table @gcctabopt
1234 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1235 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1236 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1237
1238 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1239 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1240
1241 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1242 UltraSPARC extensions.
1243
1244 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1245 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1246 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1247
1248 @item -bump
1249 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1250 @end table
1251 @end ifset
1252
1253 @ifset TIC54X
1254 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1255 architecture.
1256
1257 @table @gcctabopt
1258 @item -mfar-mode
1259 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1260 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1261 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1262 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1263 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1264 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1265 behaviour in the shell.
1266 @end table
1267 @end ifset
1268
1269 @ifset MIPS
1270 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1271 a MIPS processor.
1272
1273 @table @gcctabopt
1274 @item -G @var{num}
1275 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1276 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1277 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1278
1279 @cindex MIPS endianness
1280 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1281 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1282 @item -EB
1283 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1284
1285 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1286 @item -EL
1287 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1288
1289 @cindex MIPS ISA
1290 @item -mips1
1291 @itemx -mips2
1292 @itemx -mips3
1293 @itemx -mips4
1294 @itemx -mips5
1295 @itemx -mips32
1296 @itemx -mips32r2
1297 @itemx -mips32r3
1298 @itemx -mips32r5
1299 @itemx -mips32r6
1300 @itemx -mips64
1301 @itemx -mips64r2
1302 @itemx -mips64r3
1303 @itemx -mips64r5
1304 @itemx -mips64r6
1305 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1306 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1307 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1308 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1309 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3},
1310 @samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips32r6}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2},
1311 @samp{-mips64r3}, @samp{-mips64r5}, and @samp{-mips64r6} correspond to generic
1312 MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32
1313 Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and
1314 MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively.
1315
1316 @item -march=@var{cpu}
1317 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1318
1319 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1320 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1321
1322 @item -mfix7000
1323 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1324 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1325 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1326
1327 @item -mfix-rm7000
1328 @itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
1329 Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
1330 followed by a load instruction.
1331
1332 @item -mdebug
1333 @itemx -no-mdebug
1334 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1335 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1336
1337 @item -mpdr
1338 @itemx -mno-pdr
1339 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1340
1341 @item -mgp32
1342 @itemx -mfp32
1343 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1344 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1345 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1346 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1347
1348 @item -mgp64
1349 @itemx -mfp64
1350 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1351 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at
1352 all times. @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1353 and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1354
1355 @item -mfpxx
1356 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using
1357 this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant
1358 which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are
1359 32 or 64 bits wide.
1360
1361 @item -modd-spreg
1362 @itemx -mno-odd-spreg
1363 Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision
1364 registers when supported by the ISA. @samp{-mfpxx} implies
1365 @samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}.
1366
1367 @item -mips16
1368 @itemx -no-mips16
1369 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1370 @code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1371 turns off this option.
1372
1373 @item -mmicromips
1374 @itemx -mno-micromips
1375 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1376 @code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-micromips}
1377 turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips}
1378 at the start of the assembly file.
1379
1380 @item -msmartmips
1381 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1382 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1383 equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1384 @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1385
1386 @item -mips3d
1387 @itemx -no-mips3d
1388 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1389 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1390 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1391
1392 @item -mdmx
1393 @itemx -no-mdmx
1394 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1395 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1396 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1397
1398 @item -mdsp
1399 @itemx -mno-dsp
1400 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1401 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1402 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1403
1404 @item -mdspr2
1405 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1406 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1407 This option implies -mdsp.
1408 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1409 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1410
1411 @item -mmsa
1412 @itemx -mno-msa
1413 Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
1414 This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
1415 @samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
1416
1417 @item -mxpa
1418 @itemx -mno-xpa
1419 Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension.
1420 This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions.
1421 @samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option.
1422
1423 @item -mmt
1424 @itemx -mno-mt
1425 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1426 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1427 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1428
1429 @item -mmcu
1430 @itemx -mno-mcu
1431 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1432 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1433 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1434
1435 @item -minsn32
1436 @itemx -mno-insn32
1437 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1438 microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1439 instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1440 the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1441 option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1442 start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1443 selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1444
1445 @item --construct-floats
1446 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1447 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1448 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1449 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1450 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1451 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1452
1453 @item --relax-branch
1454 @itemx --no-relax-branch
1455 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1456 branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1457 out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1458
1459 @item -mnan=@var{encoding}
1460 Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
1461 (@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default.
1462
1463 @cindex emulation
1464 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1465 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1466 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was
1467 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1468 It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1469
1470 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1471 @samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1472 is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1473 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1474 preferred options instead.
1475
1476 @item -nocpp
1477 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1478 the native tools.
1479
1480 @item --trap
1481 @itemx --no-trap
1482 @itemx --break
1483 @itemx --no-break
1484 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1485 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1486 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1487 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1488 break exception.
1489
1490 @item -n
1491 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1492 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1493 @end table
1494 @end ifset
1495
1496 @ifset MCORE
1497 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1498 an MCore processor.
1499
1500 @table @gcctabopt
1501 @item -jsri2bsr
1502 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1503 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1504 The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1505
1506 @item -sifilter
1507 @itemx -nosifilter
1508 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1509 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1510
1511 @item -relax
1512 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1513
1514 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1515 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1516 can be assembled.
1517
1518 @item -EB
1519 Assemble for a big endian target.
1520
1521 @item -EL
1522 Assemble for a little endian target.
1523
1524 @end table
1525 @end ifset
1526 @c man end
1527
1528 @ifset METAG
1529
1530 @ifclear man
1531 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1532 for a Meta processor.
1533 @end ifclear
1534
1535 @ifset man
1536 @c man begin OPTIONS
1537 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1538 Meta processor.
1539 @c man end
1540 @c man begin INCLUDE
1541 @include c-metag.texi
1542 @c ended inside the included file
1543 @end ifset
1544
1545 @end ifset
1546
1547 @c man begin OPTIONS
1548 @ifset MMIX
1549 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1550 @end ifset
1551
1552 @ifset NDS32
1553
1554 @ifclear man
1555 @xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1556 for a NDS32 processor.
1557 @end ifclear
1558 @c ended inside the included file
1559 @end ifset
1560
1561 @ifset man
1562 @c man begin OPTIONS
1563 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1564 NDS32 processor.
1565 @c man end
1566 @c man begin INCLUDE
1567 @include c-nds32.texi
1568 @c ended inside the included file
1569 @end ifset
1570
1571 @c man end
1572 @ifset PPC
1573
1574 @ifclear man
1575 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1576 for a PowerPC processor.
1577 @end ifclear
1578
1579 @ifset man
1580 @c man begin OPTIONS
1581 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1582 PowerPC processor.
1583 @c man end
1584 @c man begin INCLUDE
1585 @include c-ppc.texi
1586 @c ended inside the included file
1587 @end ifset
1588
1589 @end ifset
1590
1591 @c man begin OPTIONS
1592 @ifset RX
1593 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1594 @end ifset
1595
1596 @ifset S390
1597 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1598 processor family.
1599
1600 @table @gcctabopt
1601 @item -m31
1602 @itemx -m64
1603 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1604 @item -mesa
1605 @item -mzarch
1606 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1607 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1608 @item -march=@var{processor}
1609 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g6}, @samp{g6},
1610 @samp{z900}, @samp{z990}, @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec}, @samp{z10},
1611 @samp{z196}, @samp{zEC12}, or @samp{z13}.
1612 @item -mregnames
1613 @itemx -mno-regnames
1614 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1615 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1616 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1617 but evaluates to zero.
1618 @end table
1619 @end ifset
1620 @c man end
1621
1622 @ifset TIC6X
1623
1624 @ifclear man
1625 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1626 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1627 @end ifclear
1628
1629 @ifset man
1630 @c man begin OPTIONS
1631 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1632 TMS320C6000 processor.
1633 @c man end
1634 @c man begin INCLUDE
1635 @include c-tic6x.texi
1636 @c ended inside the included file
1637 @end ifset
1638
1639 @end ifset
1640
1641 @ifset TILEGX
1642
1643 @ifclear man
1644 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1645 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1646 @end ifclear
1647
1648 @ifset man
1649 @c man begin OPTIONS
1650 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1651 processor.
1652 @c man end
1653 @c man begin INCLUDE
1654 @include c-tilegx.texi
1655 @c ended inside the included file
1656 @end ifset
1657
1658 @end ifset
1659
1660 @ifset VISIUM
1661
1662 @ifclear man
1663 @xref{Visium Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1664 for a Visium processor.
1665 @end ifclear
1666
1667 @ifset man
1668 @c man begin OPTIONS
1669 The following option is available when @value{AS} is configured for a Visium
1670 processor.
1671 @c man end
1672 @c man begin INCLUDE
1673 @include c-visium.texi
1674 @c ended inside the included file
1675 @end ifset
1676
1677 @end ifset
1678
1679 @ifset XTENSA
1680
1681 @ifclear man
1682 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1683 for an Xtensa processor.
1684 @end ifclear
1685
1686 @ifset man
1687 @c man begin OPTIONS
1688 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1689 Xtensa processor.
1690 @c man end
1691 @c man begin INCLUDE
1692 @include c-xtensa.texi
1693 @c ended inside the included file
1694 @end ifset
1695
1696 @end ifset
1697
1698 @c man begin OPTIONS
1699
1700 @ifset Z80
1701 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1702 a Z80 family processor.
1703 @table @gcctabopt
1704 @item -z80
1705 Assemble for Z80 processor.
1706 @item -r800
1707 Assemble for R800 processor.
1708 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1709 @itemx -Wnud
1710 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1711 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1712 @itemx -Wnup
1713 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1714 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1715 @itemx -Wud
1716 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1717 @item -warn-unportable-instructions
1718 @itemx -Wup
1719 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1720 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1721 @itemx -Fud
1722 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1723 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1724 @itemx -Fup
1725 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1726 @end table
1727 @end ifset
1728
1729 @c man end
1730
1731 @menu
1732 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1733 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1734 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1735 * Command Line:: Command Line
1736 * Input Files:: Input Files
1737 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1738 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1739 @end menu
1740
1741 @node Manual
1742 @section Structure of this Manual
1743
1744 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1745 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1746 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1747 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1748 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1749
1750 @ifclear GENERIC
1751 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1752 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1753 @end ifclear
1754 @ifset GENERIC
1755 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1756 various flavors of the assembler.
1757 @end ifset
1758
1759 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1760 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1761 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1762 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1763 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1764 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1765 particular architecture.
1766 @ifset GENERIC
1767 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1768 machine architecture manual for this information.
1769 @end ifset
1770 @ifclear GENERIC
1771 @ifset H8/300
1772 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1773 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1774 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1775 @end ifset
1776 @ifset SH
1777 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1778 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1779 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1780 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1781 @end ifset
1782 @ifset Z8000
1783 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1784 @end ifset
1785 @end ifclear
1786
1787 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1788 @ignore
1789 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1790 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1791 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1792 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1793 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1794 qualification.
1795
1796 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1797 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1798 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
1799 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1800 @end ignore
1801
1802 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1803 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
1804 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1805 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1806 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1807 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1808 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1809 @c directives).
1810
1811 @node GNU Assembler
1812 @section The GNU Assembler
1813
1814 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1815
1816 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1817 @ifclear GENERIC
1818 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1819 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1820 @end ifclear
1821 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1822 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1823 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
1824 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1825 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1826
1827 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1828 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1829 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1830 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1831 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1832 machine would assemble.
1833 @ifset VAX
1834 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1835 @end ifset
1836 @ifset M680X0
1837 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1838 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1839 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1840 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1841 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1842 @end ifset
1843
1844 @c man end
1845
1846 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1847 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
1848 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1849
1850 @node Object Formats
1851 @section Object File Formats
1852
1853 @cindex object file format
1854 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1855 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
1856 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1857 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
1858 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1859 @ifclear GENERIC
1860 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1861 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1862 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1863 @end ifclear
1864 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1865 @ifset I960
1866 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1867 @code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1868 @end ifset
1869 @ifset HPPA
1870 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1871 SOM or ELF format object files.
1872 @end ifset
1873 @end ifclear
1874
1875 @node Command Line
1876 @section Command Line
1877
1878 @cindex command line conventions
1879
1880 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1881 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
1882 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
1883 significant.
1884
1885 @cindex standard input, as input file
1886 @kindex --
1887 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1888 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
1889
1890 @cindex options, command line
1891 Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
1892 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
1893 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
1894 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
1895 the letter is important. All options are optional.
1896
1897 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
1898 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
1899 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
1900 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
1901
1902 @smallexample
1903 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
1904 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
1905 @end smallexample
1906
1907 @node Input Files
1908 @section Input Files
1909
1910 @cindex input
1911 @cindex source program
1912 @cindex files, input
1913 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
1914 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
1915 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
1916 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
1917
1918 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
1919 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
1920 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
1921 order specified.
1922
1923 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1924 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
1925 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
1926 (The standard input is also a file.)
1927
1928 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
1929 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
1930 command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
1931 is taken to be an input file name.
1932
1933 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
1934 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
1935 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
1936 to assemble.
1937
1938 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
1939 in your command line.
1940
1941 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
1942 file.
1943
1944 @c man end
1945
1946 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
1947
1948 @cindex input file linenumbers
1949 @cindex line numbers, in input files
1950 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
1951 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
1952 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
1953 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
1954
1955 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
1956 to @command{@value{AS}}.
1957
1958 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
1959 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
1960 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
1961 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
1962 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
1963 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
1964
1965 @node Object
1966 @section Output (Object) File
1967
1968 @cindex object file
1969 @cindex output file
1970 @kindex a.out
1971 @kindex .o
1972 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
1973 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
1974 is the object file. Its default name is
1975 @ifclear BOUT
1976 @code{a.out}.
1977 @end ifclear
1978 @ifset BOUT
1979 @ifset GENERIC
1980 @code{a.out}, or
1981 @end ifset
1982 @code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
1983 @end ifset
1984 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
1985 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
1986 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
1987 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
1988 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
1989
1990 @cindex linker
1991 @kindex ld
1992 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
1993 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
1994 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
1995 information for the debugger.
1996
1997 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
1998 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
1999
2000 @node Errors
2001 @section Error and Warning Messages
2002
2003 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2004
2005 @cindex error messages
2006 @cindex warning messages
2007 @cindex messages from assembler
2008 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
2009 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
2010 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
2011 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
2012 grave problem that stops the assembly.
2013
2014 @c man end
2015
2016 @cindex format of warning messages
2017 Warning messages have the format
2018
2019 @smallexample
2020 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
2021 @end smallexample
2022
2023 @noindent
2024 @cindex line numbers, in warnings/errors
2025 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If a logical file name has been given
2026 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) it is used for the filename, otherwise the name of
2027 the current input file is used. If a logical line number was given
2028 @ifset GENERIC
2029 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
2030 @end ifset
2031 then it is used to calculate the number printed,
2032 otherwise the actual line in the current source file is printed. The
2033 message text is intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix
2034 tradition).
2035
2036 @cindex format of error messages
2037 Error messages have the format
2038 @smallexample
2039 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
2040 @end smallexample
2041 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
2042 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
2043 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
2044
2045 @node Invoking
2046 @chapter Command-Line Options
2047
2048 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
2049 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
2050 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
2051 for options specific
2052 @ifclear GENERIC
2053 to the @value{TARGET} target.
2054 @end ifclear
2055 @ifset GENERIC
2056 to particular machine architectures.
2057 @end ifset
2058
2059 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2060
2061 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
2062 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
2063 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
2064 by commas. For example:
2065
2066 @smallexample
2067 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
2068 @end smallexample
2069
2070 @noindent
2071 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
2072 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
2073 local symbols in the symbol table).
2074
2075 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
2076 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
2077 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
2078 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
2079 assembler.)
2080
2081 @c man end
2082
2083 @menu
2084 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
2085 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
2086 * D:: -D for compatibility
2087 * f:: -f to work faster
2088 * I:: -I for .include search path
2089 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2090 * K:: -K for compatibility
2091 @end ifclear
2092 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2093 * K:: -K for difference tables
2094 @end ifset
2095
2096 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
2097 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
2098 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
2099 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
2100 * o:: -o to name the object file
2101 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
2102 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
2103 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
2104 * v:: -v to announce version
2105 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
2106 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
2107 @end menu
2108
2109 @node a
2110 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
2111
2112 @kindex -a
2113 @kindex -ac
2114 @kindex -ad
2115 @kindex -ag
2116 @kindex -ah
2117 @kindex -al
2118 @kindex -an
2119 @kindex -as
2120 @cindex listings, enabling
2121 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
2122
2123 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
2124 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
2125 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
2126 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
2127 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
2128 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
2129 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
2130 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
2131 also.
2132
2133 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2134 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2135
2136 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
2137 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2138 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2139 omitted from the listing.
2140
2141 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2142 listing.
2143
2144 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2145 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2146 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2147 @code{.sbttl}.
2148 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2149 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2150 listing-control directives have no effect.
2151
2152 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2153 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2154
2155 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2156 because it
2157 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
2158 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2159 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2160 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2161 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2162
2163 @node alternate
2164 @section @option{--alternate}
2165
2166 @kindex --alternate
2167 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2168
2169 @node D
2170 @section @option{-D}
2171
2172 @kindex -D
2173 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2174 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2175 @command{@value{AS}}.
2176
2177 @node f
2178 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2179
2180 @kindex -f
2181 @cindex trusted compiler
2182 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2183 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2184 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2185 and comment preprocessing on
2186 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2187 ,Preprocessing}.
2188
2189 @quotation
2190 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2191 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2192 not work correctly.
2193 @end quotation
2194
2195 @node I
2196 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2197
2198 @kindex -I @var{path}
2199 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
2200 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
2201 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
2202 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2203 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2204 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2205 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2206 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2207 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2208 specified (left to right) on the command line.
2209
2210 @node K
2211 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2212
2213 @kindex -K
2214 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2215 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2216 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2217 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2218 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2219 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2220 alteration on other platforms.
2221 @end ifclear
2222
2223 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2224 @cindex difference tables, warning
2225 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2226 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2227 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2228 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2229 is done.
2230 @end ifset
2231
2232 @node L
2233 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2234
2235 @kindex -L
2236 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2237 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2238 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2239 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2240 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2241 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2242 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2243 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2244
2245 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2246 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2247 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2248
2249 @node listing
2250 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2251
2252 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2253 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2254 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2255 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2256 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2257 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2258 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2259 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2260
2261 @table @gcctabopt
2262 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2263 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2264 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2265 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2266 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2267
2268 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2269 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2270 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2271 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2272 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2273 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2274 switch is used the default is to one.
2275
2276 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2277 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2278 @cindex Width of source line output
2279 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2280 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2281 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2282
2283 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2284 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2285 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2286 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2287 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2288 @end table
2289
2290 @node M
2291 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2292
2293 @kindex -M
2294 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2295 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2296 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2297 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2298 configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the
2299 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2300 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2301 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2302 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2303
2304 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2305 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2306 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2307 individually. These are:
2308
2309 @itemize @bullet
2310 @item global symbols in common section
2311
2312 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2313 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2314 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2315 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2316 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2317
2318 @item complex relocations
2319
2320 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2321 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2322 are not support by other object file formats.
2323
2324 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2325
2326 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2327 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2328 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2329 script.
2330
2331 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2332
2333 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2334 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2335
2336 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2337
2338 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2339 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2340 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2341 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2342 assigned within a linker script.
2343 @end itemize
2344
2345 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2346 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2347 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2348
2349 @itemize @bullet
2350
2351 @item EBCDIC strings
2352
2353 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2354
2355 @item packed binary coded decimal
2356
2357 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2358 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2359
2360 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2361
2362 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2363
2364 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2365
2366 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2367
2368 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2369
2370 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2371 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2372 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2373 these options serve no purpose.
2374
2375 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2376
2377 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2378 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2379 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2380
2381 @item other @code{OPT} options
2382
2383 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2384 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2385
2386 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2387
2388 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2389 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2390
2391 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2392
2393 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2394
2395 @item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2396
2397 The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2398
2399 @item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2400
2401 The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2402
2403 @item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2404
2405 The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2406
2407 @item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2408
2409 The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2410
2411 @item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2412
2413 The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2414
2415 @item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2416
2417 The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2418
2419 @end itemize
2420
2421 @node MD
2422 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2423
2424 @kindex --MD
2425 @cindex dependency tracking
2426 @cindex make rules
2427
2428 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2429 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2430 dependencies of the main source file.
2431
2432 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2433
2434 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2435
2436 @node o
2437 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2438
2439 @kindex -o
2440 @cindex naming object file
2441 @cindex object file name
2442 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2443 default it has the name
2444 @ifset GENERIC
2445 @ifset I960
2446 @file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2447 @end ifset
2448 @ifclear I960
2449 @file{a.out}.
2450 @end ifclear
2451 @end ifset
2452 @ifclear GENERIC
2453 @ifset I960
2454 @file{b.out}.
2455 @end ifset
2456 @ifclear I960
2457 @file{a.out}.
2458 @end ifclear
2459 @end ifclear
2460 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2461 object file a different name.
2462
2463 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2464 existing file of the same name.
2465
2466 @node R
2467 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2468
2469 @kindex -R
2470 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2471 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2472 @cindex joining text and data sections
2473 @cindex merging text and data sections
2474 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2475 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2476 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2477 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2478 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2479 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2480
2481 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2482 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2483 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2484 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2485
2486 @ifset COFF-ELF
2487 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2488 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2489 @samp{.data}.
2490 @end ifset
2491
2492 @ifset HPPA
2493 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2494 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2495 @end ifset
2496
2497 @node statistics
2498 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2499
2500 @kindex --statistics
2501 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2502 @cindex time, total for assembly
2503 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2504 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2505 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2506 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2507 seconds).
2508
2509 @node traditional-format
2510 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2511
2512 @kindex --traditional-format
2513 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2514 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2515 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2516
2517 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2518 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2519
2520 @node v
2521 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2522
2523 @kindex -v
2524 @kindex -version
2525 @cindex assembler version
2526 @cindex version of assembler
2527 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2528 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2529 command line.
2530
2531 @node W
2532 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2533
2534 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2535 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2536 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2537 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2538
2539 @kindex -W
2540 @kindex --no-warn
2541 @cindex suppressing warnings
2542 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2543 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2544 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2545 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2546 are still reported.
2547
2548 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2549 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2550 @cindex warnings, causing error
2551 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2552 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2553
2554 @kindex --warn
2555 @cindex warnings, switching on
2556 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2557 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2558
2559 @node Z
2560 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2561 @cindex object file, after errors
2562 @cindex errors, continuing after
2563 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2564 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2565 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2566 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2567 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2568 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2569
2570 @node Syntax
2571 @chapter Syntax
2572
2573 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2574 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2575 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2576 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2577 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2578 @ifclear VAX
2579 assembler.
2580 @end ifclear
2581 @ifset VAX
2582 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2583 @end ifset
2584
2585 @menu
2586 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2587 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2588 * Comments:: Comments
2589 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2590 * Statements:: Statements
2591 * Constants:: Constants
2592 @end menu
2593
2594 @node Preprocessing
2595 @section Preprocessing
2596
2597 @cindex preprocessing
2598 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2599 @itemize @bullet
2600 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2601 @item
2602 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2603 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2604 a single space.
2605
2606 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2607 @item
2608 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2609 appropriate number of newlines.
2610
2611 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2612 @item
2613 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2614 @end itemize
2615
2616 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2617 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2618 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2619 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2620 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2621 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2622 Output, gcc.info, Using GNU CC}.
2623
2624 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2625 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2626 preprocessed.
2627
2628 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2629 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2630 @kindex #NO_APP
2631 @kindex #APP
2632 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2633 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2634 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2635 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2636 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2637 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2638 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2639 and whitespace.
2640
2641 @node Whitespace
2642 @section Whitespace
2643
2644 @cindex whitespace
2645 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2646 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2647 people to read. Unless within character constants
2648 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2649 as exactly one space.
2650
2651 @node Comments
2652 @section Comments
2653
2654 @cindex comments
2655 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2656 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2657
2658 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2659 This means you may not nest these comments.
2660
2661 @smallexample
2662 /*
2663 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2664 is to use this sort of comment.
2665 */
2666
2667 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2668 @end smallexample
2669
2670 @cindex line comment character
2671 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2672 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2673 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2674 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2675 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2676 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2677 upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the
2678 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2679
2680 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2681 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2682 to specify logical line numbers:
2683
2684 @kindex #
2685 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2686 @cindex logical line numbers
2687 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2688 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2689 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2690 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2691 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2692
2693 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2694 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2695
2696 @smallexample
2697 # This is an ordinary comment.
2698 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2699 # This is logical line # 36.
2700 @end smallexample
2701 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2702 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2703
2704 @node Symbol Intro
2705 @section Symbols
2706
2707 @cindex characters used in symbols
2708 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2709 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2710 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2711 @samp{_.$}.
2712 @end ifclear
2713 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2714 @ifclear GENERIC
2715 @ifset H8
2716 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2717 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2718 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2719 symbol names.)
2720 @end ifset
2721 @end ifclear
2722 @end ifset
2723 @ifset GENERIC
2724 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2725 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2726 @end ifset
2727 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2728 There is no length limit: all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2729 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2730 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2731 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2732 @cindex length of symbols
2733
2734 @node Statements
2735 @section Statements
2736
2737 @cindex statements, structure of
2738 @cindex line separator character
2739 @cindex statement separator character
2740
2741 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2742 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2743 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2744 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2745 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2746 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2747 exception: they do not end statements.
2748
2749 @cindex newline, required at file end
2750 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2751 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2752 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2753
2754 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2755
2756 @cindex instructions and directives
2757 @cindex directives and instructions
2758 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2759 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2760 @c 13feb91.
2761 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2762 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2763 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2764 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2765 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2766 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2767 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2768 @ifset GENERIC
2769 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2770 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2771 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2772 language.@refill
2773 @end ifset
2774
2775 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2776 @cindex label (@code{:})
2777 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2778 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2779 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2780
2781 @ifset HPPA
2782 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2783 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
2784 only one label may be defined on each line.
2785 @end ifset
2786
2787 @smallexample
2788 label: .directive followed by something
2789 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
2790 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2791 @end smallexample
2792
2793 @node Constants
2794 @section Constants
2795
2796 @cindex constants
2797 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2798 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
2799 @smallexample
2800 @group
2801 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2802 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
2803 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2804 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2805 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
2806 @end group
2807 @end smallexample
2808
2809 @menu
2810 * Characters:: Character Constants
2811 * Numbers:: Number Constants
2812 @end menu
2813
2814 @node Characters
2815 @subsection Character Constants
2816
2817 @cindex character constants
2818 @cindex constants, character
2819 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
2820 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2821 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
2822 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2823 used in arithmetic expressions.
2824
2825 @menu
2826 * Strings:: Strings
2827 * Chars:: Characters
2828 @end menu
2829
2830 @node Strings
2831 @subsubsection Strings
2832
2833 @cindex string constants
2834 @cindex constants, string
2835 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
2836 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
2837 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2838 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
2839 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2840 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2841 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2842 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
2843
2844 @cindex escape codes, character
2845 @cindex character escape codes
2846 @table @kbd
2847 @c @item \a
2848 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2849 @c
2850 @cindex @code{\b} (backspace character)
2851 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2852 @item \b
2853 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2854
2855 @c @item \e
2856 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2857 @c
2858 @cindex @code{\f} (formfeed character)
2859 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
2860 @item \f
2861 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
2862
2863 @cindex @code{\n} (newline character)
2864 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
2865 @item \n
2866 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
2867
2868 @c @item \p
2869 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
2870 @c
2871 @cindex @code{\r} (carriage return character)
2872 @cindex carriage return (@code{\r})
2873 @item \r
2874 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
2875
2876 @c @item \s
2877 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
2878 @c other assemblers.
2879 @c
2880 @cindex @code{\t} (tab)
2881 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
2882 @item \t
2883 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
2884
2885 @c @item \v
2886 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
2887 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2888 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
2889 @c
2890 @cindex @code{\@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
2891 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
2892 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2893 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
2894 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
2895 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
2896
2897 @cindex @code{\@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
2898 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
2899 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
2900 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
2901 lower case @code{x} works.
2902
2903 @cindex @code{\\} (@samp{\} character)
2904 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
2905 @item \\
2906 Represents one @samp{\} character.
2907
2908 @c @item \'
2909 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
2910 @c This is needed in single character literals
2911 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
2912 @c a @samp{'}.
2913 @c
2914 @cindex @code{\"} (doublequote character)
2915 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
2916 @item \"
2917 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
2918 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
2919
2920 @item \ @var{anything-else}
2921 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
2922 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
2923 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
2924 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
2925 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
2926 code and warns you of the fact.
2927 @end table
2928
2929 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
2930 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
2931 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
2932 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
2933 sequence.
2934
2935 @node Chars
2936 @subsubsection Characters
2937
2938 @cindex single character constant
2939 @cindex character, single
2940 @cindex constant, single character
2941 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately
2942 followed by that character. The same escapes apply to characters as
2943 to strings. So if you want to write the character backslash, you
2944 must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second
2945 @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a
2946 grave accent. A newline
2947 @ifclear GENERIC
2948 @ifclear abnormal-separator
2949 (or semicolon @samp{;})
2950 @end ifclear
2951 @ifset abnormal-separator
2952 @ifset H8
2953 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
2954 Renesas SH)
2955 @end ifset
2956 @end ifset
2957 @end ifclear
2958 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
2959 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
2960 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
2961 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
2962 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
2963
2964 @node Numbers
2965 @subsection Number Constants
2966
2967 @cindex constants, number
2968 @cindex number constants
2969 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
2970 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
2971 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
2972 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
2973 are floating point numbers, described below.
2974
2975 @menu
2976 * Integers:: Integers
2977 * Bignums:: Bignums
2978 * Flonums:: Flonums
2979 @ifclear GENERIC
2980 @ifset I960
2981 * Bit Fields:: Bit Fields
2982 @end ifset
2983 @end ifclear
2984 @end menu
2985
2986 @node Integers
2987 @subsubsection Integers
2988 @cindex integers
2989 @cindex constants, integer
2990
2991 @cindex binary integers
2992 @cindex integers, binary
2993 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
2994 the binary digits @samp{01}.
2995
2996 @cindex octal integers
2997 @cindex integers, octal
2998 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
2999 digits (@samp{01234567}).
3000
3001 @cindex decimal integers
3002 @cindex integers, decimal
3003 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
3004 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
3005
3006 @cindex hexadecimal integers
3007 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
3008 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
3009 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
3010
3011 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
3012 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
3013 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
3014
3015 @node Bignums
3016 @subsubsection Bignums
3017
3018 @cindex bignums
3019 @cindex constants, bignum
3020 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
3021 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
3022 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
3023 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
3024
3025 @node Flonums
3026 @subsubsection Flonums
3027 @cindex flonums
3028 @cindex floating point numbers
3029 @cindex constants, floating point
3030
3031 @cindex precision, floating point
3032 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
3033 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
3034 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
3035 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
3036 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
3037 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
3038
3039 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
3040 @itemize @bullet
3041 @item
3042 The digit @samp{0}.
3043 @ifset HPPA
3044 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
3045 @end ifset
3046
3047 @item
3048 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
3049 @ifset GENERIC
3050 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
3051 @ignore
3052 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
3053 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
3054 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
3055 @end ignore
3056
3057 On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
3058 and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
3059 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3060
3061 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
3062 (in upper or lower case).
3063
3064 On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
3065 one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3066
3067 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
3068 @end ifset
3069 @ifclear GENERIC
3070 @ifset ARC
3071 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
3072 @end ifset
3073 @ifset H8
3074 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3075 @end ifset
3076 @ifset HPPA
3077 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
3078 @end ifset
3079 @ifset I960
3080 One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3081 @end ifset
3082 @end ifclear
3083
3084 @item
3085 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3086
3087 @item
3088 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
3089
3090 @item
3091 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
3092 or more decimal digits.
3093
3094 @item
3095 An optional exponent, consisting of:
3096
3097 @itemize @bullet
3098 @item
3099 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
3100 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
3101 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
3102 @item
3103 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3104 @item
3105 One or more decimal digits.
3106 @end itemize
3107
3108 @end itemize
3109
3110 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
3111 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
3112
3113 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
3114 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
3115 @command{@value{AS}}.
3116
3117 @ifclear GENERIC
3118 @ifset I960
3119 @c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
3120 @c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
3121 @c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
3122 @node Bit Fields
3123 @subsubsection Bit Fields
3124
3125 @cindex bit fields
3126 @cindex constants, bit field
3127 You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
3128 Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
3129 @example
3130 @var{mask}:@var{value}
3131 @end example
3132 @noindent
3133 @command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
3134 @var{value}.
3135
3136 The resulting number is then packed
3137 @ifset GENERIC
3138 @c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
3139 (in host-dependent byte order)
3140 @end ifset
3141 into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
3142 bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
3143 requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
3144 more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
3145 least significant digits.@refill
3146
3147 The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
3148 @code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
3149 @end ifset
3150 @end ifclear
3151
3152 @node Sections
3153 @chapter Sections and Relocation
3154 @cindex sections
3155 @cindex relocation
3156
3157 @menu
3158 * Secs Background:: Background
3159 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3160 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3161 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3162 * bss:: bss Section
3163 @end menu
3164
3165 @node Secs Background
3166 @section Background
3167
3168 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3169 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3170 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3171
3172 @cindex linker, and assembler
3173 @cindex assembler, and linker
3174 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3175 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3176 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3177 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3178 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3179 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3180 sections.
3181
3182 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3183 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3184 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3185 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3186 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3187 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3188 the proper run-time addresses.
3189 @ifset H8
3190 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3191 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3192 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3193 @end ifset
3194
3195 @cindex standard assembler sections
3196 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3197 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3198 @dfn{bss} sections.
3199
3200 @ifset COFF-ELF
3201 @ifset GENERIC
3202 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3203 @end ifset
3204 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3205 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3206 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3207 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3208 @end ifset
3209
3210 @ifset HPPA
3211 @ifset GENERIC
3212 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3213 @end ifset
3214 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3215 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3216 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3217 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3218 assembler directives.
3219
3220 @ifset SOM
3221 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3222 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3223 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3224 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3225 @end ifset
3226 @end ifset
3227
3228 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3229 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3230
3231 @ifset HPPA
3232 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3233 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3234 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3235 @end ifset
3236
3237 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3238 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3239 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3240 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3241 file is mentioned:
3242 @itemize @bullet
3243 @item
3244 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3245 an address?
3246 @item
3247 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3248 @item
3249 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3250 @display
3251 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3252 @end display
3253 @item
3254 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3255 @end itemize
3256
3257 @cindex addresses, format of
3258 @cindex section-relative addressing
3259 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3260 @display
3261 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3262 @end display
3263 @noindent
3264 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3265 nature.
3266 @ifset SOM
3267 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3268 symbol-relative instead.)
3269 @end ifset
3270
3271 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3272 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3273
3274 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3275 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3276 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3277 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3278 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3279 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3280 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3281 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3282 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3283
3284 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3285 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3286 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3287 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3288 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3289 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3290 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3291
3292 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3293 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3294 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3295 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3296 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3297 data and bss sections.
3298
3299 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3300 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3301
3302 @node Ld Sections
3303 @section Linker Sections
3304 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3305
3306 @table @strong
3307
3308 @ifset COFF-ELF
3309 @cindex named sections
3310 @cindex sections, named
3311 @item named sections
3312 @end ifset
3313 @ifset aout-bout
3314 @cindex text section
3315 @cindex data section
3316 @itemx text section
3317 @itemx data section
3318 @end ifset
3319 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3320 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3321 true of another.
3322 @c @ifset aout-bout
3323 When the program is running, however, it is
3324 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3325 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3326 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3327 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3328 in the data section.
3329 @c @end ifset
3330
3331 @cindex bss section
3332 @item bss section
3333 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3334 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3335 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3336 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3337 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3338 those explicit zeros from object files.
3339
3340 @cindex absolute section
3341 @item absolute section
3342 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3343 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3344 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3345 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3346
3347 @cindex undefined section
3348 @item undefined section
3349 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3350 the preceding sections.
3351 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3352 @end table
3353
3354 @cindex relocation example
3355 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3356 @ifset COFF-ELF
3357 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3358 @end ifset
3359 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3360
3361 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3362 @ifnottex
3363 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3364 @smallexample
3365 +-----+----+--+
3366 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3367 +-----+----+--+
3368
3369 text data bss
3370 seg. seg. seg.
3371
3372 +---+---+---+
3373 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3374 +---+---+---+
3375
3376 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3377 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3378 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3379
3380 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3381 @end smallexample
3382 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3383 @end ifnottex
3384 @need 5000
3385 @tex
3386 \bigskip
3387 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3388 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3389 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3390
3391 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3392 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3393 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3394
3395 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3396 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3397 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3398 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3399 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3400
3401 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3402 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3403
3404 @end tex
3405 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3406
3407 @node As Sections
3408 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3409
3410 @cindex internal assembler sections
3411 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3412 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3413 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3414 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3415 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3416 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3417 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3418 section-relative address.
3419
3420 @table @b
3421 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3422 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3423 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3424 bug in the assembler.
3425
3426 @cindex expr (internal section)
3427 @item expr section
3428 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3429 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3430 it in the expr section.
3431 @c FIXME item debug
3432 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3433 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3434 @c FIXME item register
3435 @end table
3436
3437 @node Sub-Sections
3438 @section Sub-Sections
3439
3440 @cindex numbered subsections
3441 @cindex grouping data
3442 @ifset aout-bout
3443 Assembled bytes
3444 @ifset COFF-ELF
3445 conventionally
3446 @end ifset
3447 fall into two sections: text and data.
3448 @end ifset
3449 You may have separate groups of
3450 @ifset GENERIC
3451 data in named sections
3452 @end ifset
3453 @ifclear GENERIC
3454 @ifclear aout-bout
3455 data in named sections
3456 @end ifclear
3457 @ifset aout-bout
3458 text or data
3459 @end ifset
3460 @end ifclear
3461 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3462 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3463 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3464 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3465 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3466 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3467 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3468 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3469 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3470 constants being output.
3471
3472 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3473 goes in subsection number zero.
3474
3475 @ifset GENERIC
3476 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3477 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3478 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3479 @end ifset
3480 @ifclear GENERIC
3481 @ifset H8
3482 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3483 boundary (two bytes).
3484 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3485 @end ifset
3486 @ifset I960
3487 @c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3488 @c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3489 @c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3490 @c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue,
3491 @c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3492 @c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3493 @end ifset
3494 @end ifclear
3495
3496 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3497 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3498 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3499 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3500 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3501 data subsections as a data section.
3502
3503 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3504 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3505 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3506 @ifset COFF
3507 @ifset GENERIC
3508 When generating COFF output, you
3509 @end ifset
3510 @ifclear GENERIC
3511 You
3512 @end ifclear
3513 can also use an extra subsection
3514 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3515 @var{expression}}.
3516 @end ifset
3517 @ifset ELF
3518 @ifset GENERIC
3519 When generating ELF output, you
3520 @end ifset
3521 @ifclear GENERIC
3522 You
3523 @end ifclear
3524 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3525 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3526 @end ifset
3527 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3528 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3529 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3530 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3531 @smallexample
3532 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3533 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3534 .text 1
3535 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3536 .data 0
3537 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3538 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3539 .text 0
3540 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3541 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3542 @end smallexample
3543
3544 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3545 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3546 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3547 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3548 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3549 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3550 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3551
3552 @node bss
3553 @section bss Section
3554
3555 @cindex bss section
3556 @cindex common variable storage
3557 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3558 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3559 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3560 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3561 section are zeroed bytes.
3562
3563 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3564 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3565
3566 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3567 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3568
3569 @ifset GENERIC
3570 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3571 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3572 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3573 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3574 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3575 @end ifset
3576
3577 @node Symbols
3578 @chapter Symbols
3579
3580 @cindex symbols
3581 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3582 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3583 to debug.
3584
3585 @quotation
3586 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3587 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3588 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3589 @end quotation
3590
3591 @menu
3592 * Labels:: Labels
3593 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3594 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3595 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3596 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3597 @end menu
3598
3599 @node Labels
3600 @section Labels
3601
3602 @cindex labels
3603 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3604 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3605 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3606 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3607 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3608 definitions.
3609
3610 @ifset HPPA
3611 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3612 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3613 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3614 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3615 @end ifset
3616
3617 @node Setting Symbols
3618 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3619
3620 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3621 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3622 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3623 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3624 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3625 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3626 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3627 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3628
3629 @ifset Blackfin
3630 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3631 @end ifset
3632
3633 @node Symbol Names
3634 @section Symbol Names
3635
3636 @cindex symbol names
3637 @cindex names, symbol
3638 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3639 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3640 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3641 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3642 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3643 particular target machine), and underscores.
3644 @end ifclear
3645 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3646 @ifset H8
3647 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3648 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3649 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3650 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3651 @end ifset
3652 @end ifset
3653
3654 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3655 than @code{Foo}.
3656
3657 Symbol names do not start with a digit. An exception to this rule is made for
3658 Local Labels. See below.
3659
3660 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3661 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3662 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3663 currently supported.
3664
3665 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3666 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3667 in a program.
3668
3669 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3670
3671 @cindex local symbol names
3672 @cindex symbol names, local
3673 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3674 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3675 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3676 set of local label prefixes.
3677 @ifset HPPA
3678 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3679 @end ifset
3680
3681 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3682 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3683 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols})
3684 to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3685
3686 @subheading Local Labels
3687
3688 @cindex local labels
3689 @cindex temporary symbol names
3690 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3691 Local labels are different from local symbols. Local labels help compilers and
3692 programmers use names temporarily. They create symbols which are guaranteed to
3693 be unique over the entire scope of the input source code and which can be
3694 referred to by a simple notation. To define a local label, write a label of
3695 the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N} represents any positive integer). To refer
3696 to the most recent previous definition of that label write @samp{@b{N}b}, using
3697 the same number as when you defined the label. To refer to the next definition
3698 of a local label, write @samp{@b{N}f}---the @samp{b} stands for ``backwards''
3699 and the @samp{f} stands for ``forwards''.
3700
3701 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3702 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3703 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3704 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3705 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3706 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3707 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3708
3709 Here is an example:
3710
3711 @smallexample
3712 1: branch 1f
3713 2: branch 1b
3714 1: branch 2f
3715 2: branch 1b
3716 @end smallexample
3717
3718 Which is the equivalent of:
3719
3720 @smallexample
3721 label_1: branch label_3
3722 label_2: branch label_1
3723 label_3: branch label_4
3724 label_4: branch label_3
3725 @end smallexample
3726
3727 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3728 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3729 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3730 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3731 these parts:
3732
3733 @table @code
3734 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3735 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3736 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3737 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3738 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3739 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3740 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3741 you may use them in debugging.
3742
3743 @item @var{number}
3744 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3745 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3746
3747 @item @kbd{C-B}
3748 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3749 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3750
3751 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3752 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3753 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3754 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3755 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3756 @end table
3757
3758 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3759 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3760
3761 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3762 @cindex dollar local symbols
3763
3764 On some targets @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of
3765 local labels called dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they
3766 become undefined) as soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain
3767 valid for only a small region of the input source code. Normal local labels,
3768 by contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined
3769 by another occurrence of the same local label.
3770
3771 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3772 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3773 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3774
3775 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3776 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3777 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3778 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3779
3780 @node Dot
3781 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3782
3783 @cindex dot (symbol)
3784 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3785 @cindex current address
3786 @cindex location counter
3787 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3788 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3789 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3790 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3791 directive.
3792 @ifclear no-space-dir
3793 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3794 @samp{.space 4}.
3795 @end ifclear
3796
3797 @node Symbol Attributes
3798 @section Symbol Attributes
3799
3800 @cindex symbol attributes
3801 @cindex attributes, symbol
3802 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3803 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3804 attributes.
3805 @ifset INTERNALS
3806 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3807 @end ifset
3808
3809 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3810 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3811 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3812 would want.
3813
3814 @menu
3815 * Symbol Value:: Value
3816 * Symbol Type:: Type
3817 @ifset aout-bout
3818 @ifset GENERIC
3819 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3820 @end ifset
3821 @ifclear GENERIC
3822 @ifclear BOUT
3823 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3824 @end ifclear
3825 @ifset BOUT
3826 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3827 @end ifset
3828 @end ifclear
3829 @end ifset
3830 @ifset COFF
3831 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
3832 @end ifset
3833 @ifset SOM
3834 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
3835 @end ifset
3836 @end menu
3837
3838 @node Symbol Value
3839 @subsection Value
3840
3841 @cindex value of a symbol
3842 @cindex symbol value
3843 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
3844 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3845 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3846 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3847 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
3848 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3849 called absolute.
3850
3851 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
3852 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
3853 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3854 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3855 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3856 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3857 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
3858 allocated storage.
3859
3860 @node Symbol Type
3861 @subsection Type
3862
3863 @cindex type of a symbol
3864 @cindex symbol type
3865 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
3866 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
3867 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
3868 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
3869
3870 @ifset aout-bout
3871 @ifclear GENERIC
3872 @ifset BOUT
3873 @c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be
3874 @c better if it were available outside examples.
3875 @need 1000
3876 @node a.out Symbols
3877 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3878
3879 @cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
3880 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
3881 These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
3882 one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
3883 @code{b.out}.
3884
3885 @end ifset
3886 @ifclear BOUT
3887 @node a.out Symbols
3888 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3889
3890 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3891 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3892
3893 @end ifclear
3894 @end ifclear
3895 @ifset GENERIC
3896 @node a.out Symbols
3897 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3898
3899 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3900 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3901
3902 @end ifset
3903 @menu
3904 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
3905 * Symbol Other:: Other
3906 @end menu
3907
3908 @node Symbol Desc
3909 @subsubsection Descriptor
3910
3911 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
3912 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
3913 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
3914 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
3915 @command{@value{AS}}.
3916
3917 @node Symbol Other
3918 @subsubsection Other
3919
3920 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
3921 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
3922 @end ifset
3923
3924 @ifset COFF
3925 @node COFF Symbols
3926 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
3927
3928 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
3929 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
3930
3931 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
3932 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
3933 @code{.endef} directives.
3934
3935 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
3936
3937 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
3938 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
3939 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
3940
3941 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
3942
3943 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
3944 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
3945 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
3946 table information for COFF.
3947 @end ifset
3948
3949 @ifset SOM
3950 @node SOM Symbols
3951 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
3952
3953 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
3954 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
3955
3956 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
3957 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
3958
3959 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
3960 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
3961 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
3962 @end ifset
3963
3964 @node Expressions
3965 @chapter Expressions
3966
3967 @cindex expressions
3968 @cindex addresses
3969 @cindex numeric values
3970 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
3971 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
3972
3973 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
3974 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
3975 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
3976 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
3977 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
3978 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
3979
3980 @menu
3981 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
3982 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
3983 @end menu
3984
3985 @node Empty Exprs
3986 @section Empty Expressions
3987
3988 @cindex empty expressions
3989 @cindex expressions, empty
3990 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
3991 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
3992 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
3993 is compatible with other assemblers.
3994
3995 @node Integer Exprs
3996 @section Integer Expressions
3997
3998 @cindex integer expressions
3999 @cindex expressions, integer
4000 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
4001 by @emph{operators}.
4002
4003 @menu
4004 * Arguments:: Arguments
4005 * Operators:: Operators
4006 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
4007 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
4008 @end menu
4009
4010 @node Arguments
4011 @subsection Arguments
4012
4013 @cindex expression arguments
4014 @cindex arguments in expressions
4015 @cindex operands in expressions
4016 @cindex arithmetic operands
4017 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
4018 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
4019 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
4020 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
4021 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
4022 instruction operands.
4023
4024 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
4025 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
4026 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
4027 integer.
4028
4029 Numbers are usually integers.
4030
4031 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
4032 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
4033 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
4034 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
4035 assemblers.
4036
4037 @cindex subexpressions
4038 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
4039 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
4040 operator followed by an argument.
4041
4042 @node Operators
4043 @subsection Operators
4044
4045 @cindex operators, in expressions
4046 @cindex arithmetic functions
4047 @cindex functions, in expressions
4048 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
4049 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
4050 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
4051 whitespace.
4052
4053 @node Prefix Ops
4054 @subsection Prefix Operator
4055
4056 @cindex prefix operators
4057 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
4058 one argument, which must be absolute.
4059
4060 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
4061 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
4062 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
4063 @tex
4064 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
4065 @end tex
4066
4067 @table @code
4068 @item -
4069 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
4070 @item ~
4071 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
4072 @end table
4073
4074 @tex
4075 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
4076 @end tex
4077
4078 @node Infix Ops
4079 @subsection Infix Operators
4080
4081 @cindex infix operators
4082 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
4083 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
4084 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
4085 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
4086 absolute, and the result is absolute.
4087
4088 @enumerate
4089 @cindex operator precedence
4090 @cindex precedence of operators
4091
4092 @item
4093 Highest Precedence
4094
4095 @table @code
4096 @item *
4097 @dfn{Multiplication}.
4098
4099 @item /
4100 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
4101
4102 @item %
4103 @dfn{Remainder}.
4104
4105 @item <<
4106 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
4107
4108 @item >>
4109 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
4110 @end table
4111
4112 @item
4113 Intermediate precedence
4114
4115 @table @code
4116 @item |
4117
4118 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
4119
4120 @item &
4121 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
4122
4123 @item ^
4124 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
4125
4126 @item !
4127 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
4128 @end table
4129
4130 @item
4131 Low Precedence
4132
4133 @table @code
4134 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
4135 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
4136 @cindex arguments for addition
4137 @item +
4138 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4139 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
4140 sections.
4141
4142 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4143 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
4144 @cindex arguments for subtraction
4145 @item -
4146 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
4147 result has the section of the left argument.
4148 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4149 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4150 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4151
4152 @cindex comparison expressions
4153 @cindex expressions, comparison
4154 @item ==
4155 @dfn{Is Equal To}
4156 @item <>
4157 @itemx !=
4158 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4159 @item <
4160 @dfn{Is Less Than}
4161 @item >
4162 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
4163 @item >=
4164 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4165 @item <=
4166 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4167
4168 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
4169 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4170 perform signed comparisons.
4171 @end table
4172
4173 @item Lowest Precedence
4174
4175 @table @code
4176 @item &&
4177 @dfn{Logical And}.
4178
4179 @item ||
4180 @dfn{Logical Or}.
4181
4182 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4183 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4184 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4185 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4186
4187 @end table
4188 @end enumerate
4189
4190 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4191 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4192
4193 @node Pseudo Ops
4194 @chapter Assembler Directives
4195
4196 @cindex directives, machine independent
4197 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4198 @cindex machine independent directives
4199 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4200 The rest of the name is letters, usually in lower case.
4201
4202 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4203 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4204 @ifset GENERIC
4205 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4206 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4207 @end ifset
4208 @ifclear GENERIC
4209 @ifset machine-directives
4210 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4211 @end ifset
4212 @end ifclear
4213
4214 @menu
4215 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
4216 @ifset COFF
4217 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4218 @end ifset
4219
4220 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4221 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4222 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4223 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4224 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4225 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, etc
4226 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4227 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4228 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4229 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4230 @ifset COFF
4231 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4232 @end ifset
4233 @ifset aout-bout
4234 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4235 @end ifset
4236 @ifset COFF
4237 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4238 @end ifset
4239
4240 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4241 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4242 * Else:: @code{.else}
4243 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4244 * End:: @code{.end}
4245 @ifset COFF
4246 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4247 @end ifset
4248
4249 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4250 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4251 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4252 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4253 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4254 * Err:: @code{.err}
4255 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4256 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4257 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4258 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4259 * File:: @code{.file}
4260 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4261 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4262 * Func:: @code{.func}
4263 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4264 @ifset ELF
4265 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4266 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4267 @end ifset
4268
4269 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4270 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4271 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4272 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4273 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4274 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4275 @ifset ELF
4276 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4277 @end ifset
4278
4279 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4280 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4281 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4282 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4283 @ifclear no-line-dir
4284 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4285 @end ifclear
4286
4287 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4288 * List:: @code{.list}
4289 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4290 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4291 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4292 @ifset ELF
4293 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4294 @end ifset
4295
4296 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4297 @ignore
4298 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4299 @end ignore
4300
4301 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4302 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4303 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4304 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4305 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4306 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4307 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4308 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4309 @ifset ELF
4310 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4311 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4312 @end ifset
4313
4314 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4315 @ifset ELF
4316 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4317 @end ifset
4318
4319 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4320 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4321 @ifset ELF
4322 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4323 @end ifset
4324
4325 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4326 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4327 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4328 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4329 @ifset COFF
4330 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4331 @end ifset
4332 @ifset COFF-ELF
4333 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4334 @end ifset
4335
4336 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4337 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4338 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4339 @ifset COFF-ELF
4340 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4341 @end ifset
4342 @ifclear no-space-dir
4343 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4344 @end ifclear
4345
4346 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4347 @ifclear no-space-dir
4348 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4349 @end ifclear
4350 @ifset have-stabs
4351 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4352 @end ifset
4353
4354 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4355 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4356 @ifset ELF
4357 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4358 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4359 @end ifset
4360
4361 @ifset COFF
4362 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4363 @end ifset
4364
4365 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4366 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4367 @ifset COFF-ELF
4368 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4369 @end ifset
4370
4371 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4372 @ifset COFF
4373 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4374 @end ifset
4375
4376 @ifset ELF
4377 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4378 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4379 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4380 @end ifset
4381
4382 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4383 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4384 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4385 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4386 @ifclear no-space-dir
4387 * Zero:: @code{.zero @var{size}}
4388 @end ifclear
4389 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4390 @end menu
4391
4392 @node Abort
4393 @section @code{.abort}
4394
4395 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4396 @cindex stopping the assembly
4397 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4398 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4399 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4400 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4401 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4402
4403 @ifset COFF
4404 @node ABORT (COFF)
4405 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4406
4407 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4408 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4409 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4410
4411 @ifset BOUT
4412 When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4413 but ignores it.
4414 @end ifset
4415 @end ifset
4416
4417 @node Align
4418 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4419
4420 @cindex padding the location counter
4421 @cindex @code{align} directive
4422 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4423 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4424 required, as described below.
4425
4426 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4427 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4428 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4429 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4430 with no-op instructions.
4431
4432 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4433 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4434 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4435 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4436 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4437 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4438 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4439
4440 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4441 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or1k,
4442 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4443 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4444 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4445 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4446 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4447
4448 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4449 strongarm, it is the
4450 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4451 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4452 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4453 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4454
4455 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4456 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4457 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4458 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4459 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4460
4461 @node Altmacro
4462 @section @code{.altmacro}
4463 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4464
4465 @ftable @code
4466 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4467 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4468 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4469 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4470 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4471 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4472 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4473
4474 @item String delimiters
4475 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4476 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4477
4478 @table @code
4479 @item '@var{string}'
4480 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4481
4482 @item <@var{string}>
4483 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4484 @end table
4485
4486 @item single-character string escape
4487 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4488 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4489 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4490 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4491
4492 @item Expression results as strings
4493 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4494 and use the result as a string.
4495 @end ftable
4496
4497 @node Ascii
4498 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4499
4500 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4501 @cindex string literals
4502 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4503 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4504 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4505
4506 @node Asciz
4507 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4508
4509 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4510 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4511 @cindex null-terminated strings
4512 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4513 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4514
4515 @node Balign
4516 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4517
4518 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4519 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4520 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4521 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4522 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4523 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4524 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4525
4526 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4527 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4528 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4529 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4530 with no-op instructions.
4531
4532 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4533 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4534 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4535 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4536 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4537 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4538 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4539
4540 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4541 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4542 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4543 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4544 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4545 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4546 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4547 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4548 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4549 undefined.
4550
4551 @node Bundle directives
4552 @section Bundle directives
4553 @subsection @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4554 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4555 @cindex bundle
4556 @cindex instruction bundle
4557 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4558 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4559 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4560 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4561 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4562 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4563 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4564
4565 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4566 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4567 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4568 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4569 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4570 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4571 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4572 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4573 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4574 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4575 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4576
4577 @subsection @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4578 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4579 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4580 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4581 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4582 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4583 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4584 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4585 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4586
4587 @cindex bundle-locked
4588 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4589 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4590 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4591 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4592 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4593 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4594 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4595 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4596 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4597 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4598 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4599 bundle size.
4600
4601 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4602 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4603 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4604 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4605 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4606 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4607
4608 @node Byte
4609 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4610
4611 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4612 @cindex integers, one byte
4613 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4614 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4615
4616 @node CFI directives
4617 @section CFI directives
4618 @subsection @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4619 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4620 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4621 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4622 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4623 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4624 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4625 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4626
4627 On targets that support compact unwinding tables these can be generated
4628 by specifying @code{.eh_frame_entry} instead of @code{.eh_frame}.
4629
4630 @subsection @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4631 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4632 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4633 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4634 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4635 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4636
4637 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4638 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4639
4640 @subsection @code{.cfi_endproc}
4641 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4642 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4643 unwind entry previously opened by
4644 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4645
4646 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4647 @cindex @code{cfi_personality} directive
4648 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4649 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4650 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4651 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4652 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4653 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4654 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4655 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4656 no personality routine.
4657
4658 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality_id @var{id}}
4659 @cindex @code{cfi_personality_id} directive
4660 @code{cfi_personality_id} defines a personality routine by its index as
4661 defined in a compact unwinding format.
4662 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4663 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4664
4665 @subsection @code{.cfi_fde_data [@var{opcode1} [, @dots{}]]}
4666 @cindex @code{cfi_fde_data} directive
4667 @code{cfi_fde_data} is used to describe the compact unwind opcodes to be
4668 used for the current function. These are emitted inline in the
4669 @code{.eh_frame_entry} section if small enough and there is no LSDA, or
4670 in the @code{.gnu.extab} section otherwise.
4671 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4672 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4673
4674 @subsection @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4675 @section @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4676 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4677 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4678 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), the second
4679 argument is not present, otherwise the second argument should be a constant
4680 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4681 meaning that no LSDA is present.
4682
4683 @subsection @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} [@var{align}]
4684 @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} marks the start of a LSDA data section and
4685 switches to the corresponding @code{.gnu.extab} section.
4686 Must be preceded by a CFI block containing a @code{.cfi_lsda} directive.
4687 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4688 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4689
4690 The table header and unwinding opcodes will be generated at this point,
4691 so that they are immediately followed by the LSDA data. The symbol
4692 referenced by the @code{.cfi_lsda} directive should still be defined
4693 in case a fallback FDE based encoding is used. The LSDA data is terminated
4694 by a section directive.
4695
4696 The optional @var{align} argument specifies the alignment required.
4697 The alignment is specified as a power of two, as with the
4698 @code{.p2align} directive.
4699
4700 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4701 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4702 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4703
4704 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4705 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4706 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4707 remains the same.
4708
4709 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4710 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4711 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4712 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4713 CFA address.
4714
4715 @subsection @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4716 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4717 value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
4718
4719 @subsection @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4720 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4721 CFA.
4722
4723 @subsection @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4724 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4725 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4726 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4727 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4728 code it's annotating.
4729
4730 @subsection @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4731 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4732
4733 @subsection @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4734 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4735 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4736 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4737
4738 @subsection @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4739 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4740
4741 @subsection @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4742 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4743 i.e. no restoration needed.
4744
4745 @subsection @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4746 First save all current rules for all registers by @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4747 then totally screw them up by subsequent @code{.cfi_*} directives and when
4748 everything is hopelessly bad, use @code{.cfi_restore_state} to restore
4749 the previous saved state.
4750
4751 @subsection @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4752 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4753 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4754
4755 @subsection @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4756 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4757
4758 @subsection @code{.cfi_window_save}
4759 SPARC register window has been saved.
4760
4761 @subsection @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4762 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4763 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4764 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4765
4766 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4767 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4768 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4769 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4770
4771 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4772 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
4773 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4774 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4775 or another register.
4776
4777 @node Comm
4778 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4779
4780 @cindex @code{comm} directive
4781 @cindex symbol, common
4782 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
4783 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4784 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4785 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4786 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
4787 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4788 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4789 using the largest size.
4790
4791 @ifset COFF-ELF
4792 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4793 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4794 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4795 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4796 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4797 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4798 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4799 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
4800 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4801 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4802 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4803 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4804 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
4805 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
4806 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
4807 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
4808 @end ifset
4809
4810 @ifset HPPA
4811 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
4812 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4813 @end ifset
4814
4815 @node Data
4816 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4817
4818 @cindex @code{data} directive
4819 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
4820 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
4821 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
4822 to zero.
4823
4824 @ifset COFF
4825 @node Def
4826 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
4827
4828 @cindex @code{def} directive
4829 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
4830 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
4831 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
4832 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
4833 @ifset BOUT
4834
4835 This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
4836 format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
4837 but ignored.
4838 @end ifset
4839 @end ifset
4840
4841 @ifset aout-bout
4842 @node Desc
4843 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4844
4845 @cindex @code{desc} directive
4846 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
4847 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
4848 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
4849 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
4850
4851 @ifset COFF
4852 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
4853 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
4854 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
4855 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
4856 @end ifset
4857 @end ifset
4858
4859 @ifset COFF
4860 @node Dim
4861 @section @code{.dim}
4862
4863 @cindex @code{dim} directive
4864 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
4865 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
4866 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
4867 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
4868 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
4869 @ifset BOUT
4870
4871 @samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
4872 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
4873 ignores it.
4874 @end ifset
4875 @end ifset
4876
4877 @node Double
4878 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4879
4880 @cindex @code{double} directive
4881 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
4882 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
4883 assembles floating point numbers.
4884 @ifset GENERIC
4885 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4886 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4887 @end ifset
4888 @ifclear GENERIC
4889 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
4890 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
4891 in @sc{ieee} format.
4892 @end ifset
4893 @end ifclear
4894
4895 @node Eject
4896 @section @code{.eject}
4897
4898 @cindex @code{eject} directive
4899 @cindex new page, in listings
4900 @cindex page, in listings
4901 @cindex listing control: new page
4902 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
4903
4904 @node Else
4905 @section @code{.else}
4906
4907 @cindex @code{else} directive
4908 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4909 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
4910 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
4911 was false.
4912
4913 @node Elseif
4914 @section @code{.elseif}
4915
4916 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
4917 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4918 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
4919 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
4920
4921 @node End
4922 @section @code{.end}
4923
4924 @cindex @code{end} directive
4925 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
4926 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
4927
4928 @ifset COFF
4929 @node Endef
4930 @section @code{.endef}
4931
4932 @cindex @code{endef} directive
4933 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
4934 @code{.def}.
4935 @ifset BOUT
4936
4937 @samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
4938 @command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
4939 directive but ignores it.
4940 @end ifset
4941 @end ifset
4942
4943 @node Endfunc
4944 @section @code{.endfunc}
4945 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
4946 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
4947
4948 @node Endif
4949 @section @code{.endif}
4950
4951 @cindex @code{endif} directive
4952 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
4953 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
4954 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
4955
4956 @node Equ
4957 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4958
4959 @cindex @code{equ} directive
4960 @cindex assigning values to symbols
4961 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
4962 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
4963 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
4964
4965 @ifset HPPA
4966 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
4967 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
4968 @end ifset
4969
4970 @ifset Z80
4971 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
4972 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
4973 On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
4974 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
4975 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
4976 @end ifset
4977
4978 @node Equiv
4979 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4980 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
4981 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
4982 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
4983 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
4984 undefined.
4985
4986 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
4987 @smallexample
4988 .ifdef SYM
4989 .err
4990 .endif
4991 .equ SYM,VAL
4992 @end smallexample
4993 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
4994
4995 @node Eqv
4996 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4997 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
4998 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
4999 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
5000 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
5001 value is taken.
5002
5003 @node Err
5004 @section @code{.err}
5005 @cindex @code{err} directive
5006 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
5007 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
5008 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
5009
5010 @node Error
5011 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
5012 @cindex error directive
5013
5014 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
5015 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
5016 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
5017 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
5018
5019 @smallexample
5020 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
5021 @end smallexample
5022
5023 @node Exitm
5024 @section @code{.exitm}
5025 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
5026
5027 @node Extern
5028 @section @code{.extern}
5029
5030 @cindex @code{extern} directive
5031 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
5032 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
5033 all undefined symbols as external.
5034
5035 @node Fail
5036 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
5037
5038 @cindex @code{fail} directive
5039 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
5040 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
5041 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
5042 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
5043 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
5044
5045 @node File
5046 @section @code{.file}
5047 @cindex @code{file} directive
5048
5049 @ifclear no-file-dir
5050 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
5051 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
5052 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
5053
5054 @subheading Default Version
5055
5056 @cindex logical file name
5057 @cindex file name, logical
5058 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
5059 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
5060
5061 @smallexample
5062 .file @var{string}
5063 @end smallexample
5064
5065 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
5066 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
5067 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
5068 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
5069 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
5070
5071 @subheading DWARF2 Version
5072 @end ifclear
5073
5074 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
5075 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
5076
5077 @smallexample
5078 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
5079 @end smallexample
5080
5081 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
5082 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
5083 literal.
5084
5085 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
5086 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
5087 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
5088 entries will have.
5089
5090 @node Fill
5091 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
5092
5093 @cindex @code{fill} directive
5094 @cindex writing patterns in memory
5095 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
5096 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
5097 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
5098 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
5099 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
5100 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
5101 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
5102 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
5103 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
5104 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
5105 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
5106 compatible with other people's assemblers.
5107
5108 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
5109 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
5110 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
5111 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
5112
5113 @node Float
5114 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
5115
5116 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
5117 @cindex @code{float} directive
5118 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5119 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
5120 @ifset GENERIC
5121 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5122 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
5123 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5124 @end ifset
5125 @ifclear GENERIC
5126 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5127 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
5128 in @sc{ieee} format.
5129 @end ifset
5130 @end ifclear
5131
5132 @node Func
5133 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
5134 @cindex @code{func} directive
5135 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
5136 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
5137 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
5138 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
5139 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
5140 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
5141 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
5142 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
5143
5144 @node Global
5145 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
5146
5147 @cindex @code{global} directive
5148 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
5149 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
5150 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
5151 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
5152 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
5153 from another file linked into the same program.
5154
5155 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
5156 compatibility with other assemblers.
5157
5158 @ifset HPPA
5159 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
5160 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
5161 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
5162 @end ifset
5163
5164 @ifset ELF
5165 @node Gnu_attribute
5166 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
5167 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
5168
5169 @node Hidden
5170 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
5171
5172 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
5173 @cindex visibility
5174 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5175 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
5176 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5177
5178 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5179 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5180 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5181 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5182 @end ifset
5183
5184 @node hword
5185 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5186
5187 @cindex @code{hword} directive
5188 @cindex integers, 16-bit
5189 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
5190 @cindex sixteen bit integers
5191 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5192 a 16 bit number for each.
5193
5194 @ifset GENERIC
5195 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5196 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5197 @end ifset
5198 @ifclear GENERIC
5199 @ifset W32
5200 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5201 @end ifset
5202 @ifset W16
5203 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5204 @end ifset
5205 @end ifclear
5206
5207 @node Ident
5208 @section @code{.ident}
5209
5210 @cindex @code{ident} directive
5211
5212 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5213 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5214 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5215 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5216 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5217 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5218 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5219
5220 @node If
5221 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5222
5223 @cindex conditional assembly
5224 @cindex @code{if} directive
5225 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5226 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5227 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5228 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5229 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5230 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5231 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5232 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5233
5234 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5235 @table @code
5236 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5237 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5238 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5239 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5240 is considered to be undefined.
5241
5242 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
5243 @item .ifb @var{text}
5244 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5245
5246 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
5247 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5248 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5249 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5250 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5251 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5252 string comparison is case sensitive.
5253
5254 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5255 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5256 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5257
5258 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5259 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5260 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5261
5262 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5263 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5264 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5265 equal to zero.
5266
5267 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5268 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5269 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5270
5271 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5272 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5273 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5274 to zero.
5275
5276 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5277 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5278 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5279
5280 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5281 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5282 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5283 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5284
5285 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5286 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5287 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5288 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5289
5290 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5291 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5292 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5293 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5294 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5295 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5296 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5297
5298 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5299 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5300 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5301 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5302
5303 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5304 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5305 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5306 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5307 @end table
5308
5309 @node Incbin
5310 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5311
5312 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5313 @cindex binary files, including
5314 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5315 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5316 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5317 around @var{file}.
5318
5319 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5320 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5321 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5322 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5323 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5324
5325 @node Include
5326 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5327
5328 @cindex @code{include} directive
5329 @cindex supporting files, including
5330 @cindex files, including
5331 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5332 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5333 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5334 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5335 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5336 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5337 around @var{file}.
5338
5339 @node Int
5340 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5341
5342 @cindex @code{int} directive
5343 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5344 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5345 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5346 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5347 of target the assembly is for.
5348
5349 @ifclear GENERIC
5350 @ifset H8
5351 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5352 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5353 32-bit integers.
5354 @end ifset
5355 @end ifclear
5356
5357 @ifset ELF
5358 @node Internal
5359 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5360
5361 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5362 @cindex visibility
5363 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5364 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5365 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5366
5367 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5368 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5369 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5370 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5371 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5372 @end ifset
5373
5374 @node Irp
5375 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5376
5377 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5378 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5379 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5380 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5381 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5382 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5383 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5384 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5385
5386 For example, assembling
5387
5388 @example
5389 .irp param,1,2,3
5390 move d\param,sp@@-
5391 .endr
5392 @end example
5393
5394 is equivalent to assembling
5395
5396 @example
5397 move d1,sp@@-
5398 move d2,sp@@-
5399 move d3,sp@@-
5400 @end example
5401
5402 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5403
5404 @node Irpc
5405 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5406
5407 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5408 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5409 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5410 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5411 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5412 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5413 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5414 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5415
5416 For example, assembling
5417
5418 @example
5419 .irpc param,123
5420 move d\param,sp@@-
5421 .endr
5422 @end example
5423
5424 is equivalent to assembling
5425
5426 @example
5427 move d1,sp@@-
5428 move d2,sp@@-
5429 move d3,sp@@-
5430 @end example
5431
5432 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5433 at @xref{Macro}.
5434
5435 @node Lcomm
5436 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5437
5438 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5439 @cindex local common symbols
5440 @cindex symbols, local common
5441 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5442 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5443 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5444 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5445 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5446 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5447
5448 @ifset GENERIC
5449 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5450 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5451 @end ifset
5452
5453 @ifset HPPA
5454 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5455 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5456 @end ifset
5457
5458 @node Lflags
5459 @section @code{.lflags}
5460
5461 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5462 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5463 assemblers, but ignores it.
5464
5465 @ifclear no-line-dir
5466 @node Line
5467 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5468
5469 @cindex @code{line} directive
5470 @cindex logical line number
5471 @ifset aout-bout
5472 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5473 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5474 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5475 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5476 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5477 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5478 @end ifset
5479
5480 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5481 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5482 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5483 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5484 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5485
5486 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5487 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5488 debugging.
5489 @end ifclear
5490
5491 @node Linkonce
5492 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5493 @cindex COMDAT
5494 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5495 @cindex common sections
5496 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5497 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5498 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5499 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5500 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5501 unique.
5502
5503 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5504 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5505 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5506
5507 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5508 following strings. For example:
5509 @smallexample
5510 .linkonce same_size
5511 @end smallexample
5512 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5513
5514 @table @code
5515 @item discard
5516 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5517
5518 @item one_only
5519 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5520
5521 @item same_size
5522 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5523
5524 @item same_contents
5525 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5526 @end table
5527
5528 @node List
5529 @section @code{.list}
5530
5531 @cindex @code{list} directive
5532 @cindex listing control, turning on
5533 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5534 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5535 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5536 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5537 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5538
5539 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5540 @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5541 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5542
5543 @node Ln
5544 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5545
5546 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5547 @ifclear no-line-dir
5548 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5549 @end ifclear
5550 @ifset no-line-dir
5551 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5552 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5553 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5554 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5555 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5556 @ifset BOUT
5557
5558 This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5559 configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5560 output format.
5561 @end ifset
5562 @end ifset
5563
5564 @node Loc
5565 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5566 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5567 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5568 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5569 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5570 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5571 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5572 the row is added.
5573
5574 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5575
5576 @table @code
5577 @item basic_block
5578 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5579 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5580
5581 @item prologue_end
5582 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5583 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5584
5585 @item epilogue_begin
5586 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5587 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5588
5589 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5590 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5591 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5592 either 0 or 1.
5593
5594 @item isa @var{value}
5595 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5596 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5597
5598 @item discriminator @var{value}
5599 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5600 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5601
5602 @end table
5603
5604 @node Loc_mark_labels
5605 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5606 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5607 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5608 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5609 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5610 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5611 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5612 this function respectively.
5613
5614 @ifset ELF
5615 @node Local
5616 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5617
5618 @cindex @code{local} directive
5619 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5620 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5621 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5622 they will be created.
5623
5624 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5625 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5626 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5627 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5628 @end ifset
5629
5630 @node Long
5631 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5632
5633 @cindex @code{long} directive
5634 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5635
5636 @ignore
5637 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5638 @c what it really ought to do
5639 @node Lsym
5640 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5641
5642 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5643 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5644 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5645 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5646 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5647 the same as the expression value:
5648 @smallexample
5649 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5650 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5651 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5652 @end smallexample
5653 @noindent
5654 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5655 @end ignore
5656
5657 @node Macro
5658 @section @code{.macro}
5659
5660 @cindex macros
5661 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5662 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5663 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5664
5665 @example
5666 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5667 .long \from
5668 .if \to-\from
5669 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5670 .endif
5671 .endm
5672 @end example
5673
5674 @noindent
5675 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5676
5677 @example
5678 .long 0
5679 .long 1
5680 .long 2
5681 .long 3
5682 .long 4
5683 .long 5
5684 @end example
5685
5686 @ftable @code
5687 @item .macro @var{macname}
5688 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5689 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5690 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5691 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5692 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5693 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5694 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5695 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5696 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5697 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5698 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5699 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5700
5701 @table @code
5702 @item .macro comm
5703 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5704 arguments.
5705
5706 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
5707 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5708 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5709 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5710 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5711
5712 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5713 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5714 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5715 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5716 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5717 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5718 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5719 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5720
5721 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5722 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5723 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5724 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5725 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5726
5727 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5728 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5729 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5730
5731 @end table
5732
5733 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5734 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5735 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5736 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
5737 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5738 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5739 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5740 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5741 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5742 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
5743 this macro definition:
5744
5745 @example
5746 .macro label l
5747 \l:
5748 .endm
5749 @end example
5750
5751 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5752 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5753 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5754 identifier.
5755
5756 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5757 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
5758 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5759 length specifier like this:
5760
5761 @example
5762 .macro opcode base length
5763 \base.\length
5764 .endm
5765 @end example
5766
5767 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5768 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5769 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5770
5771 There are several possible ways around this problem:
5772
5773 @table @code
5774 @item Insert white space
5775 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5776 solution. eg:
5777
5778 @example
5779 .macro label l
5780 \l :
5781 .endm
5782 @end example
5783
5784 @item Use @samp{\()}
5785 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5786 the following text. eg:
5787
5788 @example
5789 .macro opcode base length
5790 \base\().\length
5791 .endm
5792 @end example
5793
5794 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5795 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5796 used as a separator. eg:
5797
5798 @example
5799 .altmacro
5800 .macro label l
5801 l&:
5802 .endm
5803 @end example
5804 @end table
5805
5806 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
5807 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
5808 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
5809
5810 @item .endm
5811 @cindex @code{endm} directive
5812 Mark the end of a macro definition.
5813
5814 @item .exitm
5815 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
5816 Exit early from the current macro definition.
5817
5818 @cindex number of macros executed
5819 @cindex macros, count executed
5820 @item \@@
5821 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
5822 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
5823 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
5824
5825 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
5826 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
5827 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
5828 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
5829 @end ftable
5830
5831 @node MRI
5832 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
5833
5834 @cindex @code{mri} directive
5835 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
5836 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
5837 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
5838 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
5839 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
5840
5841 @node Noaltmacro
5842 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
5843 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
5844
5845 @node Nolist
5846 @section @code{.nolist}
5847
5848 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
5849 @cindex listing control, turning off
5850 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
5851 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5852 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5853 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5854 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5855
5856 @node Octa
5857 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
5858
5859 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn?
5860 @cindex @code{octa} directive
5861 @cindex integer, 16-byte
5862 @cindex sixteen byte integer
5863 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
5864 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
5865
5866 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5867 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
5868
5869 @node Offset
5870 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
5871
5872 @cindex @code{offset} directive
5873 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
5874 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
5875 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
5876 directive.
5877
5878 @node Org
5879 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
5880
5881 @cindex @code{org} directive
5882 @cindex location counter, advancing
5883 @cindex advancing location counter
5884 @cindex current address, advancing
5885 Advance the location counter of the current section to
5886 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
5887 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
5888 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
5889 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
5890 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
5891 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
5892 is the same as the current subsection.
5893
5894 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
5895 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
5896 backwards.
5897
5898 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
5899 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
5900 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
5901 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
5902 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
5903 a chance to share your improved assembler.
5904
5905 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
5906 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
5907 people's assemblers.
5908
5909 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
5910 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
5911 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
5912 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
5913
5914 @node P2align
5915 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
5916
5917 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
5918 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
5919 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
5920 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
5921 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
5922 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
5923 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
5924 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
5925
5926 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
5927 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
5928 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
5929 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
5930 with no-op instructions.
5931
5932 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
5933 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
5934 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
5935 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
5936 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
5937 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
5938 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
5939
5940 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
5941 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
5942 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
5943 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
5944 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
5945 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
5946 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
5947 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
5948 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
5949 undefined.
5950
5951 @ifset ELF
5952 @node PopSection
5953 @section @code{.popsection}
5954
5955 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
5956 @cindex Section Stack
5957 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5958 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5959 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
5960 (@pxref{Previous}).
5961
5962 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
5963 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
5964 stack.
5965 @end ifset
5966
5967 @ifset ELF
5968 @node Previous
5969 @section @code{.previous}
5970
5971 @cindex @code{previous} directive
5972 @cindex Section Stack
5973 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5974 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5975 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
5976 (@pxref{PopSection}).
5977
5978 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
5979 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
5980 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
5981 subsections). For example:
5982
5983 @smallexample
5984 .section A
5985 .subsection 1
5986 .word 0x1234
5987 .subsection 2
5988 .word 0x5678
5989 .previous
5990 .word 0x9abc
5991 @end smallexample
5992
5993 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
5994 section A. Whilst:
5995
5996 @smallexample
5997 .section A
5998 .subsection 1
5999 # Now in section A subsection 1
6000 .word 0x1234
6001 .section B
6002 .subsection 0
6003 # Now in section B subsection 0
6004 .word 0x5678
6005 .subsection 1
6006 # Now in section B subsection 1
6007 .word 0x9abc
6008 .previous
6009 # Now in section B subsection 0
6010 .word 0xdef0
6011 @end smallexample
6012
6013 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
6014 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
6015
6016 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
6017 the top section on the section stack.
6018 @end ifset
6019
6020 @node Print
6021 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
6022
6023 @cindex @code{print} directive
6024 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
6025 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
6026
6027 @ifset ELF
6028 @node Protected
6029 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
6030
6031 @cindex @code{protected} directive
6032 @cindex visibility
6033 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
6034 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
6035
6036 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
6037 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
6038 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
6039 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
6040 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
6041 this.
6042 @end ifset
6043
6044 @node Psize
6045 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
6046
6047 @cindex @code{psize} directive
6048 @cindex listing control: paper size
6049 @cindex paper size, for listings
6050 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
6051 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
6052
6053 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
6054 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
6055 default width is 200 columns.
6056
6057 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
6058 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
6059 @code{.eject}).
6060
6061 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
6062 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
6063
6064 @node Purgem
6065 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
6066
6067 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
6068 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
6069 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
6070
6071 @ifset ELF
6072 @node PushSection
6073 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
6074
6075 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
6076 @cindex Section Stack
6077 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6078 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6079 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6080 (@pxref{Previous}).
6081
6082 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
6083 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
6084 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
6085 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
6086 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
6087 @end ifset
6088
6089 @node Quad
6090 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
6091
6092 @cindex @code{quad} directive
6093 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
6094 each bignum, it emits
6095 @ifclear bignum-16
6096 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
6097 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
6098 @cindex eight-byte integer
6099 @cindex integer, 8-byte
6100
6101 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6102 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
6103 @end ifclear
6104 @ifset bignum-16
6105 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
6106 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
6107 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
6108 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6109 @end ifset
6110
6111 @node Reloc
6112 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
6113
6114 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
6115 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
6116 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
6117 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
6118 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
6119 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
6120 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
6121 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
6122 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
6123 section.
6124
6125 @node Rept
6126 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
6127
6128 @cindex @code{rept} directive
6129 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
6130 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
6131
6132 For example, assembling
6133
6134 @example
6135 .rept 3
6136 .long 0
6137 .endr
6138 @end example
6139
6140 is equivalent to assembling
6141
6142 @example
6143 .long 0
6144 .long 0
6145 .long 0
6146 @end example
6147
6148 @node Sbttl
6149 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
6150
6151 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
6152 @cindex subtitles for listings
6153 @cindex listing control: subtitle
6154 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
6155 title line) when generating assembly listings.
6156
6157 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6158 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6159
6160 @ifset COFF
6161 @node Scl
6162 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
6163
6164 @cindex @code{scl} directive
6165 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
6166 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
6167 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
6168 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
6169 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
6170 symbolic debugging information.
6171 @ifset BOUT
6172
6173 The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
6174 configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
6175 accepts this directive but ignores it.
6176 @end ifset
6177 @end ifset
6178
6179 @ifset COFF-ELF
6180 @node Section
6181 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
6182
6183 @cindex named section
6184 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6185 named @var{name}.
6186
6187 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6188 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6189 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6190
6191 @ifset COFF
6192 @ifset ELF
6193 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6194 @subheading COFF Version
6195 @end ifset
6196
6197 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6198 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6199 ways:
6200
6201 @smallexample
6202 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6203 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6204 @end smallexample
6205
6206 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6207 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6208 @table @code
6209 @item b
6210 bss section (uninitialized data)
6211 @item n
6212 section is not loaded
6213 @item w
6214 writable section
6215 @item d
6216 data section
6217 @item e
6218 exclude section from linking
6219 @item r
6220 read-only section
6221 @item x
6222 executable section
6223 @item s
6224 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6225 @item a
6226 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6227 @item y
6228 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6229 @item 0-9
6230 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6231 @end table
6232
6233 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6234 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6235 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6236 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6237 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6238
6239 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6240 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6241 @end ifset
6242
6243 @ifset ELF
6244 @ifset COFF
6245 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6246 @subheading ELF Version
6247 @end ifset
6248
6249 @cindex Section Stack
6250 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6251 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6252 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6253 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6254
6255 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6256 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6257
6258 @smallexample
6259 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6260 @end smallexample
6261
6262 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6263 combination of the following characters:
6264 @table @code
6265 @item a
6266 section is allocatable
6267 @item e
6268 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6269 @item w
6270 section is writable
6271 @item x
6272 section is executable
6273 @item M
6274 section is mergeable
6275 @item S
6276 section contains zero terminated strings
6277 @item G
6278 section is a member of a section group
6279 @item T
6280 section is used for thread-local-storage
6281 @item ?
6282 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6283 @end table
6284
6285 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6286 @table @code
6287 @item @@progbits
6288 section contains data
6289 @item @@nobits
6290 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6291 @item @@note
6292 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6293 @item @@init_array
6294 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6295 @item @@fini_array
6296 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6297 @item @@preinit_array
6298 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6299 @end table
6300
6301 Many targets only support the first three section types.
6302
6303 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6304 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6305 @code{%} character.
6306
6307 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6308 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6309
6310 @smallexample
6311 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6312 @end smallexample
6313
6314 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6315 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6316 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6317 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6318 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6319 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6320 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6321 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6322 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6323
6324 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6325 be present along with an additional field like this:
6326
6327 @smallexample
6328 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6329 @end smallexample
6330
6331 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6332 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6333 @table @code
6334 @item comdat
6335 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6336 @item .gnu.linkonce
6337 an alias for comdat
6338 @end table
6339
6340 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6341 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6342
6343 @smallexample
6344 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6345 @end smallexample
6346
6347 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6348 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6349 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6350 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6351 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6352 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6353
6354 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6355 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6356 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6357 executable. The section will contain data.
6358
6359 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6360 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6361
6362 @smallexample
6363 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6364 @end smallexample
6365
6366 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6367 separated flags:
6368 @table @code
6369 @item #alloc
6370 section is allocatable
6371 @item #write
6372 section is writable
6373 @item #execinstr
6374 section is executable
6375 @item #exclude
6376 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6377 @item #tls
6378 section is used for thread local storage
6379 @end table
6380
6381 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6382 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6383 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6384 work.
6385 @end ifset
6386 @end ifset
6387
6388 @node Set
6389 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6390
6391 @cindex @code{set} directive
6392 @cindex symbol value, setting
6393 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6394 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6395 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6396 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6397
6398 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly provided that the
6399 values given to the symbol are constants. Values that are based on expressions
6400 involving other symbols are allowed, but some targets may restrict this to only
6401 being done once per assembly. This is because those targets do not set the
6402 addresses of symbols at assembly time, but rather delay the assignment until a
6403 final link is performed. This allows the linker a chance to change the code in
6404 the files, changing the location of, and the relative distance between, various
6405 different symbols.
6406
6407 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6408 file is the last value stored into it.
6409
6410 @ifset Z80
6411 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6412 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6413 @end ifset
6414
6415 @node Short
6416 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6417
6418 @cindex @code{short} directive
6419 @ifset GENERIC
6420 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6421 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6422
6423 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6424 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6425 @end ifset
6426 @ifclear GENERIC
6427 @ifset W16
6428 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6429 @end ifset
6430 @ifset W32
6431 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6432 a 16 bit number for each.
6433 @end ifset
6434 @end ifclear
6435
6436 @node Single
6437 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6438
6439 @cindex @code{single} directive
6440 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6441 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6442 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6443 @ifset GENERIC
6444 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6445 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6446 @end ifset
6447 @ifclear GENERIC
6448 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6449 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6450 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6451 @end ifset
6452 @end ifclear
6453
6454 @ifset COFF-ELF
6455 @node Size
6456 @section @code{.size}
6457
6458 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6459
6460 @ifset COFF
6461 @ifset ELF
6462 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6463 @subheading COFF Version
6464 @end ifset
6465
6466 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6467 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6468 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6469
6470 @smallexample
6471 .size @var{expression}
6472 @end smallexample
6473
6474 @ifset BOUT
6475 @samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6476 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6477 ignores it.
6478 @end ifset
6479 @end ifset
6480
6481 @ifset ELF
6482 @ifset COFF
6483 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6484 @subheading ELF Version
6485 @end ifset
6486
6487 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6488 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6489
6490 @smallexample
6491 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6492 @end smallexample
6493
6494 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6495 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6496 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6497 symbols.
6498 @end ifset
6499 @end ifset
6500
6501 @ifclear no-space-dir
6502 @node Skip
6503 @section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6504
6505 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6506 @cindex filling memory
6507 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6508 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6509 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6510 @samp{.space}.
6511 @end ifclear
6512
6513 @node Sleb128
6514 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6515
6516 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6517 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6518 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6519 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6520
6521 @ifclear no-space-dir
6522 @node Space
6523 @section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6524
6525 @cindex @code{space} directive
6526 @cindex filling memory
6527 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6528 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6529 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6530 as @samp{.skip}.
6531
6532 @ifset HPPA
6533 @quotation
6534 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6535 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6536 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6537 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6538 for a summary.
6539 @end quotation
6540 @end ifset
6541 @end ifclear
6542
6543 @ifset have-stabs
6544 @node Stab
6545 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6546
6547 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6548 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6549 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6550 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6551 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6552 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6553 Up to five fields are required:
6554
6555 @table @var
6556 @item string
6557 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6558 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6559 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6560 using this field.
6561
6562 @item type
6563 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6564 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6565 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6566
6567 @item other
6568 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6569 low 8 bits of this expression.
6570
6571 @item desc
6572 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6573 bits of this expression.
6574
6575 @item value
6576 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6577 @end table
6578
6579 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6580 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6581 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6582 compatible with earlier assemblers!
6583
6584 @table @code
6585 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
6586 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6587
6588 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6589 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6590 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6591 strings.
6592
6593 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6594 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6595 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6596 assembled.
6597
6598 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
6599 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6600 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6601
6602 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
6603 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6604 All five fields are specified.
6605 @end table
6606 @end ifset
6607 @c end have-stabs
6608
6609 @node String
6610 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6611 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6612
6613 @cindex string, copying to object file
6614 @cindex string8, copying to object file
6615 @cindex string16, copying to object file
6616 @cindex string32, copying to object file
6617 @cindex string64, copying to object file
6618 @cindex @code{string} directive
6619 @cindex @code{string8} directive
6620 @cindex @code{string16} directive
6621 @cindex @code{string32} directive
6622 @cindex @code{string64} directive
6623
6624 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6625 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6626 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6627 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6628
6629 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6630 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6631 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6632 are stored in target endianness byte order.
6633
6634 Example:
6635 @smallexample
6636 .string32 "BYE"
6637 expands to:
6638 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6639 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6640 @end smallexample
6641
6642
6643 @node Struct
6644 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6645
6646 @cindex @code{struct} directive
6647 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6648 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
6649 @smallexample
6650 .struct 0
6651 field1:
6652 .struct field1 + 4
6653 field2:
6654 .struct field2 + 4
6655 field3:
6656 @end smallexample
6657 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6658 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6659 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6660 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6661 before further assembly.
6662
6663 @ifset ELF
6664 @node SubSection
6665 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6666
6667 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
6668 @cindex Section Stack
6669 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6670 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6671 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6672 (@pxref{Previous}).
6673
6674 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
6675 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6676 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6677 @end ifset
6678
6679 @ifset ELF
6680 @node Symver
6681 @section @code{.symver}
6682 @cindex @code{symver} directive
6683 @cindex symbol versioning
6684 @cindex versions of symbols
6685 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6686 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6687 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6688 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6689 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6690 shared library.
6691
6692 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6693 @smallexample
6694 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6695 @end smallexample
6696 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6697 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6698 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6699 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6700 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6701 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
6702 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6703 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6704 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6705 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6706 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6707 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
6708 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6709 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6710
6711 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6712 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
6713 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6714 symbol table.
6715
6716 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6717 @smallexample
6718 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6719 @end smallexample
6720 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6721 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6722 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6723 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6724
6725 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6726 @smallexample
6727 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6728 @end smallexample
6729 When @var{name} is not defined within the
6730 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6731 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6732 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6733 @end ifset
6734
6735 @ifset COFF
6736 @node Tag
6737 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6738
6739 @cindex COFF structure debugging
6740 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
6741 @cindex @code{tag} directive
6742 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6743 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
6744 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
6745 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
6746 @ifset BOUT
6747
6748 @samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
6749 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6750 ignores it.
6751 @end ifset
6752 @end ifset
6753
6754 @node Text
6755 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
6756
6757 @cindex @code{text} directive
6758 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
6759 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
6760 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
6761 is used.
6762
6763 @node Title
6764 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
6765
6766 @cindex @code{title} directive
6767 @cindex listing control: title line
6768 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
6769 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
6770
6771 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6772 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6773
6774 @ifset COFF-ELF
6775 @node Type
6776 @section @code{.type}
6777
6778 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
6779
6780 @ifset COFF
6781 @ifset ELF
6782 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6783 @subheading COFF Version
6784 @end ifset
6785
6786 @cindex COFF symbol type
6787 @cindex symbol type, COFF
6788 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
6789 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
6790 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6791
6792 @smallexample
6793 .type @var{int}
6794 @end smallexample
6795
6796 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
6797 entry.
6798
6799 @ifset BOUT
6800 @samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
6801 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
6802 directive but ignores it.
6803 @end ifset
6804 @end ifset
6805
6806 @ifset ELF
6807 @ifset COFF
6808 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6809 @subheading ELF Version
6810 @end ifset
6811
6812 @cindex ELF symbol type
6813 @cindex symbol type, ELF
6814 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
6815 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
6816
6817 @smallexample
6818 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
6819 @end smallexample
6820
6821 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
6822 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
6823 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
6824 compatibility with various other assemblers.
6825
6826 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
6827 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
6828 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
6829 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
6830 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
6831 assemblers.
6832
6833 The syntaxes supported are:
6834
6835 @smallexample
6836 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
6837 .type <name>,#<type>
6838 .type <name>,@@<type>
6839 .type <name>,%<type>
6840 .type <name>,"<type>"
6841 @end smallexample
6842
6843 The types supported are:
6844
6845 @table @gcctabopt
6846 @item STT_FUNC
6847 @itemx function
6848 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
6849
6850 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
6851 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
6852 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
6853 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
6854
6855 @item STT_OBJECT
6856 @itemx object
6857 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
6858
6859 @item STT_TLS
6860 @itemx tls_object
6861 Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
6862
6863 @item STT_COMMON
6864 @itemx common
6865 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
6866
6867 @item STT_NOTYPE
6868 @itemx notype
6869 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
6870
6871 @item gnu_unique_object
6872 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
6873 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
6874 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
6875 systems).
6876
6877 @end table
6878
6879 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
6880
6881 @end ifset
6882 @end ifset
6883
6884 @node Uleb128
6885 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
6886
6887 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
6888 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
6889 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6890 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
6891
6892 @ifset COFF
6893 @node Val
6894 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
6895
6896 @cindex @code{val} directive
6897 @cindex COFF value attribute
6898 @cindex value attribute, COFF
6899 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
6900 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
6901 entry.
6902 @ifset BOUT
6903
6904 @samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
6905 configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
6906 @end ifset
6907 @end ifset
6908
6909 @ifset ELF
6910 @node Version
6911 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
6912
6913 @cindex @code{version} directive
6914 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
6915 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
6916 @end ifset
6917
6918 @ifset ELF
6919 @node VTableEntry
6920 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
6921
6922 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
6923 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
6924 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
6925
6926 @node VTableInherit
6927 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
6928
6929 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
6930 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
6931 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
6932 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
6933 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
6934 @end ifset
6935
6936 @node Warning
6937 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
6938 @cindex warning directive
6939 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
6940 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
6941
6942 @node Weak
6943 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
6944
6945 @cindex @code{weak} directive
6946 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6947 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6948
6949 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
6950 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6951 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6952
6953 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
6954 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
6955 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
6956
6957 @node Weakref
6958 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
6959
6960 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
6961 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
6962 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
6963 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
6964 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
6965 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
6966
6967 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
6968 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
6969 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
6970 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
6971 had the references to the alias removed.
6972
6973 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
6974 within the assembler.
6975
6976 @node Word
6977 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
6978
6979 @cindex @code{word} directive
6980 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
6981 separated by commas.
6982 @ifclear GENERIC
6983 @ifset W32
6984 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
6985 @end ifset
6986 @ifset W16
6987 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
6988 @end ifset
6989 @end ifclear
6990 @ifset GENERIC
6991
6992 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
6993 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
6994 @end ifset
6995
6996 @c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
6997 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
6998 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6999 @cindex difference tables altered
7000 @cindex altered difference tables
7001 @quotation
7002 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
7003 @end quotation
7004
7005 @ifset GENERIC
7006 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
7007 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
7008 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
7009 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
7010
7011 @end ifset
7012 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
7013 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
7014 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
7015 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
7016 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
7017 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
7018 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
7019 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
7020 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
7021 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
7022 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
7023 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
7024 @code{sym2}.
7025
7026 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
7027 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
7028 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
7029 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
7030 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
7031 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
7032 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
7033
7034 @ifset INTERNALS
7035 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
7036 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
7037 assembly language programmers.
7038 @end ifset
7039 @end ifset
7040 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7041
7042 @ifclear no-space-dir
7043 @node Zero
7044 @section @code{.zero @var{size}}
7045
7046 @cindex @code{zero} directive
7047 @cindex filling memory with zero bytes
7048 This directive emits @var{size} 0-valued bytes. @var{size} must be an absolute
7049 expression. This directive is actually an alias for the @samp{.skip} directive
7050 so in can take an optional second argument of the value to store in the bytes
7051 instead of zero. Using @samp{.zero} in this way would be confusing however.
7052 @end ifclear
7053
7054 @node Deprecated
7055 @section Deprecated Directives
7056
7057 @cindex deprecated directives
7058 @cindex obsolescent directives
7059 One day these directives won't work.
7060 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
7061 @table @t
7062 @item .abort
7063 @item .line
7064 @end table
7065
7066 @ifset ELF
7067 @node Object Attributes
7068 @chapter Object Attributes
7069 @cindex object attributes
7070
7071 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
7072 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
7073 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
7074 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
7075 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
7076 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
7077 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
7078 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
7079 newer generation at run-time.
7080
7081 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
7082 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
7083 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
7084 correctly.
7085
7086 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
7087 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
7088 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
7089 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
7090 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
7091 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
7092
7093 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
7094 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
7095
7096 @menu
7097 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7098 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
7099 @end menu
7100
7101 @node GNU Object Attributes
7102 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7103
7104 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
7105 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
7106
7107 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
7108 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
7109 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
7110 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
7111 architecture-dependent ones.
7112
7113 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
7114
7115 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
7116
7117 @table @r
7118 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
7119 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
7120 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
7121 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
7122 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
7123 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
7124 @end table
7125
7126 @subsection MIPS Attributes
7127
7128 @table @r
7129 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
7130 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7131
7132 @itemize @bullet
7133 @item
7134 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7135 @item
7136 1 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a standard
7137 double-precision FPU.
7138 @item
7139 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
7140 @item
7141 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7142 @item
7143 4 for files using the deprecated hardware floating-point ABI which used 64-bit
7144 floating-point registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and increased the
7145 number of callee-saved floating-point registers.
7146 @item
7147 5 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a double-precision FPU
7148 with either 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers and 32-bit
7149 general-purpose registers.
7150 @item
7151 6 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7152 registers and 32-bit general-purpose registers.
7153 @item
7154 7 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7155 registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and a rule that forbids the
7156 direct use of odd-numbered single-precision floating-point registers.
7157 @end itemize
7158 @end table
7159
7160 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
7161
7162 @table @r
7163 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
7164 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7165
7166 @itemize @bullet
7167 @item
7168 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7169 @item
7170 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7171 @item
7172 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7173 @item
7174 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7175 @end itemize
7176
7177 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
7178 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7179
7180 @itemize @bullet
7181 @item
7182 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7183 @item
7184 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
7185 @item
7186 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
7187 @item
7188 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
7189 @end itemize
7190 @end table
7191
7192 @subsection IBM z Systems Attributes
7193
7194 @table @r
7195 @item Tag_GNU_S390_ABI_Vector (8)
7196 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7197
7198 @itemize @bullet
7199 @item
7200 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7201 @item
7202 1 for files using software vector ABI.
7203 @item
7204 2 for files using hardware vector ABI.
7205 @end itemize
7206 @end table
7207
7208 @node Defining New Object Attributes
7209 @section Defining New Object Attributes
7210
7211 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
7212 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
7213 mailing list.
7214
7215 @itemize @bullet
7216 @item
7217 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
7218 @item
7219 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
7220 @item
7221 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
7222 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
7223 @item
7224 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7225 @item
7226 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7227 @item
7228 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7229 @end itemize
7230
7231 @end ifset
7232
7233 @ifset GENERIC
7234 @node Machine Dependencies
7235 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7236
7237 @cindex machine dependencies
7238 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7239 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
7240 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7241 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7242 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
7243 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7244 optimization.
7245
7246 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7247 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
7248 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7249
7250 @menu
7251 @ifset AARCH64
7252 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7253 @end ifset
7254 @ifset ALPHA
7255 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7256 @end ifset
7257 @ifset ARC
7258 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7259 @end ifset
7260 @ifset ARM
7261 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7262 @end ifset
7263 @ifset AVR
7264 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7265 @end ifset
7266 @ifset Blackfin
7267 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7268 @end ifset
7269 @ifset CR16
7270 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7271 @end ifset
7272 @ifset CRIS
7273 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7274 @end ifset
7275 @ifset D10V
7276 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7277 @end ifset
7278 @ifset D30V
7279 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7280 @end ifset
7281 @ifset EPIPHANY
7282 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7283 @end ifset
7284 @ifset H8/300
7285 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7286 @end ifset
7287 @ifset HPPA
7288 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7289 @end ifset
7290 @ifset I370
7291 * ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
7292 @end ifset
7293 @ifset I80386
7294 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7295 @end ifset
7296 @ifset I860
7297 * i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features
7298 @end ifset
7299 @ifset I960
7300 * i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features
7301 @end ifset
7302 @ifset IA64
7303 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7304 @end ifset
7305 @ifset IP2K
7306 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7307 @end ifset
7308 @ifset LM32
7309 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7310 @end ifset
7311 @ifset M32C
7312 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7313 @end ifset
7314 @ifset M32R
7315 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7316 @end ifset
7317 @ifset M680X0
7318 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7319 @end ifset
7320 @ifset M68HC11
7321 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7322 @end ifset
7323 @ifset METAG
7324 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7325 @end ifset
7326 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7327 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7328 @end ifset
7329 @ifset MIPS
7330 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7331 @end ifset
7332 @ifset MMIX
7333 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7334 @end ifset
7335 @ifset MSP430
7336 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7337 @end ifset
7338 @ifset NDS32
7339 * NDS32-Dependent:: Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
7340 @end ifset
7341 @ifset NIOSII
7342 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7343 @end ifset
7344 @ifset NS32K
7345 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7346 @end ifset
7347 @ifset PDP11
7348 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7349 @end ifset
7350 @ifset PJ
7351 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7352 @end ifset
7353 @ifset PPC
7354 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7355 @end ifset
7356 @ifset RL78
7357 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7358 @end ifset
7359 @ifset RX
7360 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7361 @end ifset
7362 @ifset S390
7363 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7364 @end ifset
7365 @ifset SCORE
7366 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7367 @end ifset
7368 @ifset SH
7369 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7370 * SH64-Dependent:: SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
7371 @end ifset
7372 @ifset SPARC
7373 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7374 @end ifset
7375 @ifset TIC54X
7376 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7377 @end ifset
7378 @ifset TIC6X
7379 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7380 @end ifset
7381 @ifset TILEGX
7382 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7383 @end ifset
7384 @ifset TILEPRO
7385 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7386 @end ifset
7387 @ifset V850
7388 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7389 @end ifset
7390 @ifset VAX
7391 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7392 @end ifset
7393 @ifset VISIUM
7394 * Visium-Dependent:: Visium Dependent Features
7395 @end ifset
7396 @ifset XGATE
7397 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Features
7398 @end ifset
7399 @ifset XSTORMY16
7400 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7401 @end ifset
7402 @ifset XTENSA
7403 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7404 @end ifset
7405 @ifset Z80
7406 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7407 @end ifset
7408 @ifset Z8000
7409 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7410 @end ifset
7411 @end menu
7412
7413 @lowersections
7414 @end ifset
7415
7416 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7417 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7418 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7419 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7420 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7421 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7422 @c in both conditional blocks.
7423
7424 @ifset AARCH64
7425 @include c-aarch64.texi
7426 @end ifset
7427
7428 @ifset ALPHA
7429 @include c-alpha.texi
7430 @end ifset
7431
7432 @ifset ARC
7433 @include c-arc.texi
7434 @end ifset
7435
7436 @ifset ARM
7437 @include c-arm.texi
7438 @end ifset
7439
7440 @ifset AVR
7441 @include c-avr.texi
7442 @end ifset
7443
7444 @ifset Blackfin
7445 @include c-bfin.texi
7446 @end ifset
7447
7448 @ifset CR16
7449 @include c-cr16.texi
7450 @end ifset
7451
7452 @ifset CRIS
7453 @include c-cris.texi
7454 @end ifset
7455
7456 @ifset Renesas-all
7457 @ifclear GENERIC
7458 @node Machine Dependencies
7459 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7460
7461 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7462 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7463 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7464 family.
7465
7466 @menu
7467 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7468 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7469 @end menu
7470 @lowersections
7471 @end ifclear
7472 @end ifset
7473
7474 @ifset D10V
7475 @include c-d10v.texi
7476 @end ifset
7477
7478 @ifset D30V
7479 @include c-d30v.texi
7480 @end ifset
7481
7482 @ifset EPIPHANY
7483 @include c-epiphany.texi
7484 @end ifset
7485
7486 @ifset H8/300
7487 @include c-h8300.texi
7488 @end ifset
7489
7490 @ifset HPPA
7491 @include c-hppa.texi
7492 @end ifset
7493
7494 @ifset I370
7495 @include c-i370.texi
7496 @end ifset
7497
7498 @ifset I80386
7499 @include c-i386.texi
7500 @end ifset
7501
7502 @ifset I860
7503 @include c-i860.texi
7504 @end ifset
7505
7506 @ifset I960
7507 @include c-i960.texi
7508 @end ifset
7509
7510 @ifset IA64
7511 @include c-ia64.texi
7512 @end ifset
7513
7514 @ifset IP2K
7515 @include c-ip2k.texi
7516 @end ifset
7517
7518 @ifset LM32
7519 @include c-lm32.texi
7520 @end ifset
7521
7522 @ifset M32C
7523 @include c-m32c.texi
7524 @end ifset
7525
7526 @ifset M32R
7527 @include c-m32r.texi
7528 @end ifset
7529
7530 @ifset M680X0
7531 @include c-m68k.texi
7532 @end ifset
7533
7534 @ifset M68HC11
7535 @include c-m68hc11.texi
7536 @end ifset
7537
7538 @ifset METAG
7539 @include c-metag.texi
7540 @end ifset
7541
7542 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7543 @include c-microblaze.texi
7544 @end ifset
7545
7546 @ifset MIPS
7547 @include c-mips.texi
7548 @end ifset
7549
7550 @ifset MMIX
7551 @include c-mmix.texi
7552 @end ifset
7553
7554 @ifset MSP430
7555 @include c-msp430.texi
7556 @end ifset
7557
7558 @ifset NDS32
7559 @include c-nds32.texi
7560 @end ifset
7561
7562 @ifset NIOSII
7563 @include c-nios2.texi
7564 @end ifset
7565
7566 @ifset NS32K
7567 @include c-ns32k.texi
7568 @end ifset
7569
7570 @ifset PDP11
7571 @include c-pdp11.texi
7572 @end ifset
7573
7574 @ifset PJ
7575 @include c-pj.texi
7576 @end ifset
7577
7578 @ifset PPC
7579 @include c-ppc.texi
7580 @end ifset
7581
7582 @ifset RL78
7583 @include c-rl78.texi
7584 @end ifset
7585
7586 @ifset RX
7587 @include c-rx.texi
7588 @end ifset
7589
7590 @ifset S390
7591 @include c-s390.texi
7592 @end ifset
7593
7594 @ifset SCORE
7595 @include c-score.texi
7596 @end ifset
7597
7598 @ifset SH
7599 @include c-sh.texi
7600 @include c-sh64.texi
7601 @end ifset
7602
7603 @ifset SPARC
7604 @include c-sparc.texi
7605 @end ifset
7606
7607 @ifset TIC54X
7608 @include c-tic54x.texi
7609 @end ifset
7610
7611 @ifset TIC6X
7612 @include c-tic6x.texi
7613 @end ifset
7614
7615 @ifset TILEGX
7616 @include c-tilegx.texi
7617 @end ifset
7618
7619 @ifset TILEPRO
7620 @include c-tilepro.texi
7621 @end ifset
7622
7623 @ifset V850
7624 @include c-v850.texi
7625 @end ifset
7626
7627 @ifset VAX
7628 @include c-vax.texi
7629 @end ifset
7630
7631 @ifset VISIUM
7632 @include c-visium.texi
7633 @end ifset
7634
7635 @ifset XGATE
7636 @include c-xgate.texi
7637 @end ifset
7638
7639 @ifset XSTORMY16
7640 @include c-xstormy16.texi
7641 @end ifset
7642
7643 @ifset XTENSA
7644 @include c-xtensa.texi
7645 @end ifset
7646
7647 @ifset Z80
7648 @include c-z80.texi
7649 @end ifset
7650
7651 @ifset Z8000
7652 @include c-z8k.texi
7653 @end ifset
7654
7655 @ifset GENERIC
7656 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7657 @raisesections
7658 @end ifset
7659
7660 @node Reporting Bugs
7661 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7662 @cindex bugs in assembler
7663 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7664
7665 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7666
7667 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7668 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7669 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7670 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7671
7672 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7673 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7674
7675 @menu
7676 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7677 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7678 @end menu
7679
7680 @node Bug Criteria
7681 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7682 @cindex bug criteria
7683
7684 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7685
7686 @itemize @bullet
7687 @cindex fatal signal
7688 @cindex assembler crash
7689 @cindex crash of assembler
7690 @item
7691 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7692 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
7693
7694 @cindex error on valid input
7695 @item
7696 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7697
7698 @cindex invalid input
7699 @item
7700 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7701 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7702 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7703
7704 @item
7705 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7706 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7707 @end itemize
7708
7709 @node Bug Reporting
7710 @section How to Report Bugs
7711 @cindex bug reports
7712 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7713
7714 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
7715 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7716 contact that organization first.
7717
7718 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7719 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7720 distribution.
7721
7722 @ifset BUGURL
7723 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
7724 to @value{BUGURL}.
7725 @end ifset
7726
7727 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7728 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7729 fact or leave it out, state it!
7730
7731 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
7732 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
7733 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
7734 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
7735 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
7736 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
7737 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
7738 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7739 and the most helpful.
7740
7741 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
7742 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
7743 that the bug has not been reported previously.
7744
7745 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7746 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7747 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7748 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7749
7750 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7751
7752 @itemize @bullet
7753 @item
7754 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
7755 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
7756
7757 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7758 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
7759
7760 @item
7761 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
7762
7763 @item
7764 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7765 version number.
7766
7767 @item
7768 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
7769 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7770
7771 @item
7772 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
7773 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
7774 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7775
7776 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7777 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7778
7779 @item
7780 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
7781 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
7782 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
7783 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
7784 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
7785 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
7786 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
7787
7788 @item
7789 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7790 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7791
7792 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
7793 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
7794 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
7795 make a mistake.
7796
7797 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
7798 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
7799 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
7800 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
7801 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
7802 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
7803 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
7804 observations.
7805
7806 @item
7807 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
7808 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
7809 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
7810 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
7811 by line number.
7812
7813 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7814 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7815 @end itemize
7816
7817 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7818
7819 @itemize @bullet
7820 @item
7821 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7822
7823 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7824 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7825 changes will not affect it.
7826
7827 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7828 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7829 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7830 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7831
7832 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7833 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7834 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7835 less time, and so on.
7836
7837 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7838 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7839
7840 @item
7841 A patch for the bug.
7842
7843 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7844 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7845 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7846 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7847
7848 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
7849 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
7850 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
7851 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
7852
7853 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7854 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7855 help us to understand.
7856
7857 @item
7858 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7859
7860 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7861 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7862 @end itemize
7863
7864 @node Acknowledgements
7865 @chapter Acknowledgements
7866
7867 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
7868 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
7869 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
7870 @c (October 2012),
7871 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
7872
7873 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
7874 more details?}
7875
7876 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
7877 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
7878 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
7879
7880 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
7881 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
7882 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
7883 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
7884 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
7885 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
7886 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
7887 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
7888 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
7889 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
7890
7891 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
7892 in format-specific I/O modules.
7893
7894 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
7895 has done much work with it since.
7896
7897 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
7898
7899 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
7900
7901 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
7902 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
7903
7904 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
7905 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
7906 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
7907 support a.out format.
7908
7909 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
7910 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
7911 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
7912 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
7913 targets.
7914
7915 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
7916 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
7917 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
7918 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
7919 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
7920 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
7921 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
7922
7923 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
7924 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
7925 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
7926 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
7927
7928 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
7929
7930 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
7931
7932 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
7933 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
7934 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
7935 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
7936
7937 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
7938 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
7939 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
7940 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
7941 and some initial 64-bit support).
7942
7943 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
7944
7945 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
7946 support for openVMS/Alpha.
7947
7948 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
7949 flavors.
7950
7951 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
7952 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
7953
7954 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
7955 configuration enhancements.
7956
7957 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
7958
7959 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
7960 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
7961 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
7962 intentionally leaving anyone out.
7963
7964 @node GNU Free Documentation License
7965 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7966 @include fdl.texi
7967
7968 @node AS Index
7969 @unnumbered AS Index
7970
7971 @printindex cp
7972
7973 @bye
7974 @c Local Variables:
7975 @c fill-column: 79
7976 @c End:
This page took 0.193089 seconds and 5 git commands to generate.